Home

2008 Jeep Commander Owners Manual - Dealer e

1. Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button 164 Sunroof Fully Closed 168 Security ie RR DER hc aa Pads 4 ae e ed 164 WCommand ViewTM Skylights If Equipped 168 Troubleshooting Tips 00 164 E Power Outlet sss General Information 0 165 Front Power Outlet ipped 0 1 me ensues aed E Rear Power Outlet If Equipped 169 Opening Sunroof Express 166 ll Power Inverter If Equipped 170 Closing Sunroof Express 166 E ap Holders MT 172 O Pinch Protect Feature naana ee ee 166 Bl Cargo Area Features eie se see sees 174 Pinch Protect Override ies see 167 Cargo Load ElOOP ier tes 174 Venting Sunroof Express 167 ll Rear Window Features 04 176 Sunshade Operation 0 0 167 Rear Window Wiper Washer 176 O Wind Buffeting 0 0 0 eee een 167 Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 177 Sunroof Maintenance 00 168 ll Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 177 Ignition Off Operation a an aana aaau 168 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Adjusting Rear View
2. Cav Cartridge Min Fuse Description Cav Cartridge Min Fuse Description ity Fuse ity Fuse 13 10 Amp Autowipe R A 21 Spare Red Acc De 14 20 Amp Cigar Ltr R A lay Yellow 22 15 Amp Rear Wiper B 15 10 Amp Tire Pressure Trans Blue Red ducers R O 24 10 Amp Power Distribution 16 10 Amp Steering Control Mod Red Center PDC Relays Red ule SCM Diag Con Final Drive Control nector Cluster B tare pene Tm ront Control Module 17 m Flipper Glass B FCM R S A580 R S d dus 25 10Amp Shifter Assy BTSI Red Trans Case Switch 20 10 Amp Sentry Key Remote ESP ADS Brake Supp Red Entry Module Rly Coil R S SKREEM Cluster R S 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center Cav Cartridge Mini Fuse Description ity Fuse 2 40 Amp HID Headlamps Green 3 50 Amp PTC Heater 2 Diesel Green Only 4 30 Amp Power Outlets Pink 5 50 Amp PTC Heater 3 Diesel Red Only 6 30 Amp Cig Lighter Trail Tow Pink Batt Power Distribution Center 7 40 Amp Power Liftgate Com Green mander Only tay Cartridge Mini Fuse Description 8 40 Amp starter JB Power ity Fuse Green 1 50 Amp PTC Heater 1 Diesel 9 Spare Green Only 10 ma Spare ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Cav Cartridge Min F
3. 00 22 To Lock The Doors 202 Ree 23 To Release The Liftgate Flipper Glass 24 Using The Panic Alarm 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 12 Programming Additional Transmitters 25 Transmitter Battery Service 25 General Information lessen 26 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 26 W Door Locks EE ee 28 Manual Door Locks EE Ee ee 28 Power Door Locks is eresas eee 29 Child Protection Door Lock 30 a Windows 5 2 2620553 EE ORREL ooo EE PS 31 Power Windows 0000 e eee eee 31 Wind Butfeting uu as eese rao oa 33 aide ncn spud EER E EES ER ED DE 34 Liftgate Flipper Glass 35 Power Liftgate If Equipped 36 E Occupant Restraints ses MEE EA kg EE SR Es 38 Lap Shoulder Belts ee ee ee ee ee 39 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 40 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 44 Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped 44 Energy Management Feature 45 Seat Belt Pretensioners 0 46 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlerl 2 ieoa ara ras ERE RES KERE ER 46 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 47 Seat Belt Extender sss oco e Rev 48 Driver And Front Passenger Supp
4. 142 Electronic Stability Program 143 Traction Control System 000 140 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 142 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 136 Electronic Stability Program ESP 143 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 194 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC amp 6 4224 babes n bet ener gis Cb 192 195 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck Ls 289 Hazard Warning Flasher 366 Jacking ies dis wind Svc Sih oa edo E alan GER Ns 368 Jump Starting ee es secret esd Spe wate 374 low Hooks ss dis eb m per a Se ws 377 Emission Control System Maintenance 386 440 Engine Aur Cleaner senate Ee Sok bated etes 393 Block Heater llle 280 Break In Recommendations 69 Compartment scs rs cstiers rs 382 383 384 Compartment Identification 382 383 384 SR EE AE ELE 401 Exhaust Gas Caution 38 70 337 Fails to Start sc sa ESE 44 oud eR ERE OKRA 279 Fuel Requirements 0 333 435 Multi Displacement llle 306 o MT ME EE EO NE 389 435 Oil Change Interval less 390 Oil Disposal y ERR RR AR EE Ra 391 OW Filter vires NEE Re e Che ed 391 Oil Filter Disposal sese mm 391 Qil Selection sa 2 2 99 9 dc 8 addon eR FR hs 435 Oil Synthetic ossa ice e eee hm ep IE De a 391 Overheating ces ee E egere ER ce 367
5. Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped si 26s RE RR EES RR RE RR ER Ri 81 Lighted Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 81 lll Hands Free Communication UConnect It Equipped ius e Ea aane eee eho 82 Operation 2 355 a haod GR Adee EHE AES 84 Phone Call Features llle 91 UConnect System Features 94 Advanced Phone Connectivity 98 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Things You Should Know About Your 50 50 Third Row Folding Seat UConnect System hose em ce aw 100 It Equipped iss cm tau e Re wes 117 General Information 108 W Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 118 EE rm o rx RR he nee Sees ERR 108 Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote Front Manual Seat Adjustment 108 REICHEN Dan ed eed MERITI uie vae d Front Seat Adjustment Recline 108 Memory Position Recall 120 Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment 109 To Disable A Transmitter Linked To Memory 121 8 Way Driver s Power Seat o on oo 110 Easy Entry Exit Seat 2 ee ee ees se ee 122 4 Way Passenger s Power Seat ll To Open And Close The Hood 123 If Equipped 2 0 eee H0 dEaiihi s See Re 124 Head Restraints occ enes 110 Multi Function Control Lever 1
6. A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly f
7. WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged Child Protection Door Lock ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door rear doors which operates the front passenger rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position 815f8bd3 Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch has an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition has been turned off
8. se 247 H Satellite Radio RSC If Equipped REQ And RES Radios Only 00 0 0000 249 System Activation less 249 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID 000000 249 Selecting Satellite Mode 250 Satellite Antenna 0 00 eee 250 Reception Quality 00 250 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 250 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone Ii Equipped ascenso peser rS 253 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES IF Equipped lll Video Entertainment System Sales Code XRV It Ediippedi uas ae cade nied a e m eet iex 253 ll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 254 Radio Operation i ede rre RR 255 CD Player zudem e e ER x ws 255 ll CD DVD Disc Maintenance 256 ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 256 Bl Climate Controls e sse 257 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Manual Air Conditioning And Heating System Rear Climate Control If Equipped 267 a a ee d Operating Tips 6 6 eee eee eee 269 Em Ep an De Operating Tips Chart 272 It Equipped iem ERES 260 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 81c0b
9. 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for 2 sec onds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for 2 seconds to complete the training If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming
10. 80316864 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 11 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low tem perature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom mended cold tire pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in ord
11. Auto Headlamp Low High Beams Low High Beam Refer to EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 of this manual 2 Turn the end of the multi function control lever to the A Auto headlight position NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull back on the muti function control lever to manu ally deactivate the system normal operation of high beams 2 Pull back on the multi function control lever once again to re activate the system NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions sticker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Instrument Panel and Interior Lights When the multi function control lever is in the parklight headlight or A Auto position if equipped rotating the center portion of the lever up and down will increase and decrease the brightness dimmer control of the instru ment panel lights Full daytime brightness on all elec tronic displays odometer overhead console radio and Automatic Climate Control if equipped is obtained by rotating the center portion of the control to the first detent above the dimmer range Rotating the control to 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the second d
12. SCROLL Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip V Functions Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features and System Status Mes sages COMPASS TEMPERATURE Button Press and release the COMPASS OD TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages TURN SIGNAL ON PERFORM SERVICE KEY NOT PROGRAMMED DAMAGED KEY KEY NOT PROGRAMMED INVALID KEY KEY NOT PROGRAMMED EXCEEDED KEY PRO GRAM LIMIT PROGRAMMING ACTIVE NEW KEY PRO GRAMMED SERVICE SECURITY KEY INVALID KEY TRY ALTERNATE KEY DRIVER PASSENGER DOOR OPEN with graphic LEFT RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN with graphic X DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE DOOR OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS OPEN with graphic HOOD OPEN with graphic HOOD DOOR OPEN with graphic HOOD DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE HOOD OPEN with graphic HOOD GLASS DOOR OPEN with graphic HOOD GLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e HOOD GATE DOOR OPEN with graphic e HOOD GATE DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS DOOR OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS HOOD OPEN
13. Sys tem prompts Ready to accept vcard entry via Blue tooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX trans fers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone owners manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will be use only the first 24 characters en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phone book is recom mended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phone book entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phon
14. allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 The UConnect phone book enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy amp for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons Phone Button and Voice Recognition Button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio
15. Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two headsets Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the front seats Lowering the Display Screen 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 8161d54e Remote Control Location BACK VIEW OF STEERING WHEEL 81c0b787 en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM TAPE CD Etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pr
16. The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness d t RUNNING BATTERY anda connector LAM PS The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle BACKUP LAMPS but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector LH Refer to the following illustrations Sent RH STOP TURN RIGHT Mo od ELECTRIC m STOP TURN mi O GROUND BRAKES LEFT FEMALE 812634c6 STOP TURN PINS 7 Pin Connector PARK Towing Tips GND Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping MALE PIN and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic 813262be 4 Pin Connector 358 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the Tow Haul mode if equipped or a lower gear range should be selected NOTE Using the Tow Haul mode if equipped or a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift ing and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for trans mission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automati
17. a The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For e
18. road surfaces only Driving in the 4 LOW position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4 LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 4 HI position at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 4 HI Four Wheel Drive High Range All roads surfaces such as ice snow gravel sand and dry hard pavement N Neutral
19. 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting system which will allow the vehicle to be started up to 300 feet 91 meters away from the vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is part of your ignition key In order to remote start your vehicle the hood
20. CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant If you decide to look under the hood your self refer to Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under Cooling System Pressure Cap 14 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter later in this section 15 TOWIHAUL Indicator Light This light will illuminate when the TOW rend HAUL button has been selected The TOW HAUL button is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 16 Electronic Stability Program ESP Warning Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The ESP BAS warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS warning light comes on continuously wit
21. Control and if it has 4WD with the NV245 two speed transfer case HSA Hill Start Assist and HDC Hill Descent Control ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS WARNING ABS Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wh
22. ERS shift control allows you to move the shifter left or right when the shifter is in the D Drive position allowing the selection of the desired top gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to 2 second or 1 first when needed When in the D Drive position the first tap to the left will show the current gear For example if you are in D Drive and are in 3rd gear when you tap the gear shift one time to the left the display will show 3 Another tap to the left will shift the transmission into 2nd gear If you are in D Drive and are in 5th gear the first tap to the left will display 5 Another tap to the left will shift the transmission into 4th gear On vehicles equipped with 4 7L or 5 7L engines use of ERS or Tow Haul mode also enables a additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear im proves vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades In ERS mode on all transmissions 1st through 3rd gear are underdrive gears and 4th gear is direct drive ERS 5th gear Overdrive is the same as the normal 4th gear WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid S
23. Neutral Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Sec tion 5 of this manual 4 LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range Low speed 4 wheel drive Locks the front and rear driveshafts together Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 Shifting Procedures 4 HI to 4 LOW With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h key ON or engine running shift the transmission into N Neutral and raise the transfer case T handle The 4WD LOW Indicator Lamp in the instrument cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid when the shift is complete Release the T handle NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists a CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES message will flash from the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Shifter T Handle 4 LOW to 4 HI With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h key ON or engine running shift the transmission into N Neutral and raise the transfer case T handle The 4WD 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME LOW Indicator Lamp in the instrument cluste
24. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States espe ve eine ule KR55120123 Canada is secum chee rls IRE IN 2671 5120123 STARTING AND OPERATING 333 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 7 4 7L Engines If Equipped All engines except 5 7L engines are de signed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un 800dfab leaded regular gasoline having an oc tane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will n
25. Opening either front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection Driver s and Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during the auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Resetting the Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up Pull the window switch up and close the window com pletely then pull and hold the switch for 1 second Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on
26. Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s direction
27. and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist System provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up Refer to the Warning Section and Note Section for limitations of this system and recommendations The Rear Park Assist System will remember the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN ON position The Rear Park Assist System can be active only when the shifter is in R Reverse If the Rear Park Assist System is enabled at this shifter position the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist Sensors located in the rear fascia monitor the area behind the vehicl
28. have your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level CAUTION The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating condi tions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid Level Check 4 7L and 5 7L Engine Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in P Park 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature The fluid level is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 the fluid is low
29. instructions could result in personal injury Fold and Tumble Seat NOTE If sitting in the third row seat pull rearward on the release strap located at the rear of the seat and tumble the seat forward UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Folding Middle Seatback Second Row Seat 1 Pull the release strap Release Strap Release Strap 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ss 2 Lower the center seatback Center Seat Armrest Second Row Seat If m Equipped The second row center seat may be equipped with a armrest Pull strap to lower armrest Folding Center Seatback Armrest Second Row Seat A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 50 50 Third Row Folding Seat If Equipped To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the third row seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room 1 Open the tailgate 2 Push the seatback release handle toward rear of vehicle and lower the seatback using the pull strap Seatback Release Handle 3 Close the tailgate 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME To Raise Rear Seat 1 Open the tailgate 2 Detach pull strap from back of seat and pull seatback upward until it locks into place Reattach strap Pull Strap 3 Close the tailgate WARNING The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in t
30. liftgate and all of the doors must be closed To remote start your vehicle press the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within three seconds To indicate that the vehicle is about to start the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly if programmed To turn the horn on or off refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center Customer Pro grammable Features Sound Horn With Lock in Section 4 of this manual 81c1c0a3 Remote Start Button Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes To cancel remote start press the Remote Start button once The parking lamps will remain illuminated to indicate that the vehicle has remote started and the engine is running The lamps will turn off when the ignition is turned to RUN or the remote start is cancelled THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start you must first unlock the vehicle using the Unlock button on the key fob After the vehicle is unlocked you have 15 minutes to enter the vehicle insert the key into the ignition and move it to the RUN position Otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and automatically turn off Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved out of
31. system is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the Unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to disarm the system The Security Alarm System will not disarm with a manual unlock either through the lock plunger located on the inside of the door or through a key in the driver s door key cylinder ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances up to about 23 feet 7 meters using a hand held radio trans mitter The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter however the buttons on the remaining transmitters will continue to work Shifting the vehicle out of P Park disables all transmitter buttons for all Fobs 81bb182d 3 Button FOBIK To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the un
32. 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration SEATS Front Manual Seat Adjustment Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment bar Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near the floor Position the seat and be sure the latch engages fully WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Front Seat Adjustment Recline To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 WARNING WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area belt is no longer resting against your chest In a inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people collision you could slide under the seat belt and be riding in these areas are more likely to be seri seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner ously injured or
33. 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED mH E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique yellow fuel filler cap gas cap that states Ethanol E 85 Unleaded Gasoline and by the FLEXFUEL badge that will be located on the body of your vehicle This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles 338 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 81ae46a9 81ae46ab E 85 Fuel Cap E 85 Badge ETHANOL FUEL E 85 CAUTION E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler cap gas cap can operate on E 85 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of these two For best results a refueling pattern that alternates be tween E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided When you do switch
34. EA hae ene ae eA 320 Disabled Vehicle EE EE Eon 378 Load Capacity ia 2 200 45 44000440440 311 312 Guide ses RE cee E 350 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 323 Recreational sides RR RR bo Ea 359 Pressure Warning Light 190 Weight sheet d Renee ER NE gis 350 Quality Grading llle 454 Traction Control 1 2 ee 140 Radial cceperunt n 318 Traction Control Light 04 189 Replacement 5 cca et eei due OR Has 320 Trailer Sway Control TSC 147 Rotation pe eana ter eaba EE EE EE eee 322 Trailer Towing spie niena pai EE ee 346 male doc SE sla ests ene UD Hem Ee 72 306 Cooling System Tips casi see EE EE Ee S 358 SIZES x uus a hee eN as Cae ate ae DT heey AN aos 308 FINCHES esee eu amp eR Sarno ke Ae A 350 Spare Tire sasa mitpii ane Ba scale nets 369 Minimum Requirements 05 353 SPINNING see ae EER ERA EER HR ER Ee dessen 318 Trailer and Tongue Weight 352 Tread Wear Indicators 00 319 ur eid dene oath beet see re bed 356 Wheel Mounting kaia sag 373 Trailer Towing Guide 04 350 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 352 Trailer Weight 6 serre rum teams 4 350 Torque Converter Clutch apasata cea anisa 288 Transfer Case Lio e dex naea ee sea divans 3 410 Tow Hooks Emergency 0000000 377 Maintenance s s 54994 emer ead ober 410 Tow Haul Indicator Light 192
35. ID number Press the SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscrip tion SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second channel to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push button memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to push button memory 12 Satellite stations ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped
36. Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward windshield Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never 817892c4 spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mir
37. Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case NV140 Single Speed Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Only Transfer Case NV245 Two Speed Mopar NV 247 245 Transfer Case Lubricant Only Axle Differential Front Rear Mopar Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API GL5 or equivalent with friction modifier additive Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir This system requires the use of Mopar Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid P N 05142893AA or equivalent which meets DaimlerChrysler Ma terial Standard MS 10838 Information Provided by DEALER MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 440 Required Maintenance Intervals lll Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engines 440 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified
38. P Park The brake pedal is pressed 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the remote start sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting After either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition and moving it to the RUN position then back to LOCK DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Power Door Locks If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the The power door lock switch is located on each front door ignition switch and the driver
39. P Park For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in N Neutral Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 3 GAWR Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual for the proper inspection procedure 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor mation section of this manual for proper tire replace ment procedures Replacing tires with a higher load Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR spare tire and GAWR limits mH Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section for proper tire inflation procedures Towing Requirements Tires Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking a
40. PANEL 207 unlock button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Lock When Y YES is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Y YES or N NO appears Flash Lamps with Lock When Y YES is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Y YES or N NO appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Automatic High Beams Available with SmartBeam Only When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Y YES or N NO appears Refer to Lights SmartBeams If Equipped in Section 3 of
41. Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone key
42. RR EER 134 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls iua RE RE OE Ee EG Eg RR CARE 254 Storage Led babas nok haere aoe toy gales 426 Storage Vehicle 000 270 426 Storing Your Vehicle 0 0 00 e eee 426 Sun Roof usd rund Pea OR ee ea RE OER 165 Sun Visor Extension llle 81 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 48 Sway Control Trailer 0 0000 147 Synthetic Engine Oil i s as ds eae b es 391 System Navigation ee ee ansias 242 System Remote Starting s scos sisii aa ee ee 26 Tachoietef 42 222992 ER ey eae AE 189 Telescoping Steering Column 134 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 260 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 191 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 64 Tilt Steering Column 000000 134 Time Delay Headlight 04 129 Tire and Loading Information Placard 311 Tire Identification Number TIN 310 Tire Markings i o RR E REG 306 Tire Safety Information 04 306 Me EERS HOES ON EO 72 315 454 Air Pressure 222 ves Ee eee ea oh baad 316 Alignment and Balance lisse 321 Chains siyane eR Ed UU RE REM 322 Changing 2st pee eed die hd 368 General Information isle 315 High Speed os seri tica adj de Ged odes 318 Inflation Pressures llle 316 JACKING imc RR terial Eder Sanaa TE GS 368 en INDEX 475 Life of TILES a ae
43. Spare Tire Removal 0 0 369 AWD Models Only 000005 378 Preparations For Jacking 370 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Your vehicle s hazard warning flasher is an emergency warning system When you activate it all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Use it when your vehicle is disabled on or near the road It warns other drivers to steer clear of you and your vehicle This is an emergency warning system not to be used when the vehicle is in motion To activate the warning flashers press the button on the upper switch bank To turn the warning flashers off press the button again Hazard Warning Switch NOTE With extended use the flasher may run down your battery E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transmission in N Neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature Control to maximum heat the Mode Control to floor and
44. System The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 8 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute r p m x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 9 Security Alarm System Indicator Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 10 Oil Pressure Warning Light AE This light shows low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A continuous chim
45. The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occu pants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more air flow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Dial in the comfort setting you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver s or passenger s control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation How ever if the driver and or passenger temperature knobs are set to the full hot or full cold positions the air temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or full cold respectively With the temperature setting in these posi tions the system does not attempt automatic comfort control The air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED to flash three times and remain off This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressin
46. Transmission TA AA P 346 378 Automatic TP 283 411 HO 476 INDEX aa Maintenance ss sce c dO RR a RO OR Rs 411 Range Indicator costes cin tee haba es 194 Si AE OE EE DEE Was Sy 281 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless os EO 4009 EE aoe 25 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 159 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entty sco saga N EE eo 21 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Tread Wear Indicators 0 0005 319 Turn Signals leise 129 187 430 432 UCI Connector i26 898 244 UConnect Hands Free Phone 82 Underhood Fuses rererere terised eread 422 425 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 454 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 244 Universal Serial Bus USB Port 239 Universal Transmitter 0 0005 159 Upholstery Care s eee be REIR Keke ees 417 USB POE iue tek eere Bee ES ee 239 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 004 406 Vanity Mirrors ot gna es ed SE REX Re ES 81 Variance Compass 6 6 a EE ee EE EE ee 204 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Loading cave siege me 312 344 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Vehicle Storage 4 cec pen eb eee eee du 270 426 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System ies ees ee EE ERE haati 253 Viscosity Engine Qil ss seses ids eee 390 Warning Flasher Hazard sss ccrsecscssiesss 366 Warning Roll Over
47. Yellow None 6th LED 20 in 50 cm 28 in 70 cm Yellow None 7th LED 16 in 40 cm 20 in 50 cm Red Yes Intermittent 8th LED 6 in 15 cm 12 in 30 cm Red Yes Continuous 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone Enable Disable the Rear Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist System can be enabled and disabled with a switch located on the upper switch bank of the instrument panel Rear Park Assist Switch When the switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST DIS ABLED message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual When the shifter is changed to R Reverse and the system is disabled the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the message The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be ON when the Rear Park Assist System is disabled or defective The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Service the Rear Park Assist System When the Rear Park Assist System is defective the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES O
48. a 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD and a JukeBox virtual CD changer Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 inch touch screen allows for easy menu selection A 20 gigabyte Hard Drive HDD allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port While the Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME to the car speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include direct tune music type selections easy store presets backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera and on some models a dual display screen operation Refer to your Radio Specific User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Radio Specific User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this
49. a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAIN ING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To re program a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with PRO GRAMMING HOMELINK Step 2 and follow all remain ing steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this pre
50. a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Infants and Child Restraints e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats WARNING e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the
51. add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do no
52. ahs 389 Disposal sies ERG Sens cae aee de d b 391 Filter idu read ea e ae eA 391 Filter Disposal esi ux basa dade eee 391 Identification Logo 000 0008 390 Materials Added to 0 00000 eae 391 Pressure Warning Light 189 Recommendation less 390 435 ee N ER ede EE EE 391 VISCOSILY ecce pia de ke EER ese Tue DE N of ede 390 435 Onboard Diagnostic System 385 386 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 159 Outside Rearview Mirrors llus 79 OVvVerdflVe 24 54 e Se daa DERE RE HE BERE 286 Overdrive OFF Switch 00000008 286 Overhead Console 470 INDEX aaa Overheating Engine llle 192 367 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 452 Paint Care senede cca whew ale EE hese ERES 415 Paint Damage 3254 04 9 RR RR 415 Panic Alarm 2e as va Cae ae tale e 24 Park Sense System Rear 0 000005 153 Parking Brake 1 0 0 ui paretenia ii s 300 Passing Light sisse RE 129 Pedals Adjustable x sa ciana nia Tea E 135 Personal Settings Aa eaa es 205 Pets es inte se Gedo EE Get ED ee d ag a 69 Pets Transporting ss is 24349406 he ue peda ee 69 Phone Cellular scele 82 Phone Hands Free UConnect 82 Placard Tire and Loading Information 311 Polishing and Waxing 00006 415 Port Universal Serial Bus USB 239 USB zin e RR Wate RR Hi
53. amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate C LOAD 6 DISC MP3 WMA PUSH ON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME TUNE SCROLL 8189f8f9 REQ Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The igniti
54. and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The front passenger seat belt is equipped with a cinching latch plate The second and third row seating positions have automatic locking retractors Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt the cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For the second and third row seat belts with the automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extracted from the retrac tor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In your vehicle s 2nd row outboard seating positions you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOU
55. as indi cated with a unique feature on the side rails The grab handles A on the back of the vehicle if equipped are not to be used as a towing feature NOTE If the rear cross rail or any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception For improved satellite radio reception place the rear cross rail in detent position 4 when not in use FRONT OF ENE Gu WIND Cross Rail Positions es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 CAUTION WARNING To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle DO NOT Cargo must be securely tied before driving your carry any loads on the roof rack without cross rails vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the installed The load should be secured and placed on top R ad of the cross rails not directly on the roof If it is vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per necessary to place the load on the roof place a blanket or sonal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack some other protection between the load and the roof p R i surface Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack To avoid qur to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the rated load capacity of your cross rail system or the roof rack system maximum load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads whic
56. assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that yo
57. be pushed in to lower the head restraint to all positions The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Adjustable Head Restraints Front Heated Seats If Equipped Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe sore muscles and backs The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The front driver and passenger seats are heated The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning on the ignition you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber LEDs on the side of each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two LEDs are illuminated for high one for low and none for off Pressing the switch once will select high level heating Front Heated Seat Switches 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Pressing the switch a second time will select low level heating Pressing the switch a third time will shut the heating elements off When high temperature heating is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal high temperature level If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu ous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one
58. button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SCAN Button CD MODE Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio to the Radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Sup
59. button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE con
60. category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Ed F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 455 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representi
61. complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual The UCon nect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect syst
62. console and under the front seats to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air e Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the in strument panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passen gers These registers can be closed to block airflow Depress this button to turn on and off the air conditioning during manual operation only Con ditioned outside air is then directed through the outlets selected on the mode control dial The button includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation is selected NOTE To manually control the air conditioning the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The button includes an LED that illuminates which indicates that the recircula tion mode is active You may use this feature separately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculate icon button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and ham per visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculate to be sel
63. dealer for service assistance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle FLEXIBLE FUEL 4
64. disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iar
65. driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE Anytime the ESP system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program for a complete explanation of the available ESP modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollov
66. during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by D
67. exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pa
68. features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press Phone button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference
69. for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWER s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers
70. front of the inlet grille or Rear Control Panel heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor NOTE The rear climate control system cannot be con trolled from the front seat it can only be turned on and off All control of the rear system must be performed by the rear occupants ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Rear Temperature Control The center knob on the Rear Control Panel allows the third row seat occupants to have control of the rear temperature as follows e When the temperature knob is in the cold Blue position cold air will be delivered from the outlets As the temperature knob is turned towards the hot Red position the air will get warmer Rear Mode Control e Floor Air flows through the floor outlet located on the right side of the rear floor into the rear seating area o Bi Level a Air flows through both the outlets located in the rear quarter trim panels and the one located on the floor The rear quarter trim panel outlets can be closed to block airflow e Panel 7 Air flows through the outlets located in the rear quarter trim panels These registers can be closed to block airflow Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the Air conditioning pressing the snowflake button
71. fuels it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full e you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in drivability during warm up NOTE When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles Whether operating the vehicle on an E 85 ethanol fuel or unleaded gasoline the engine oil requirements are the same Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for the proper quality and viscosity engine oil Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in drivability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel con sumption You can expect your MPG and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to
72. function control lever controls the operation of the headlights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming passing light interior courtesy dome lights and optional fog lights es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Battery Saver Feature Exterior Interior Lights If the multi function control lever is left in the interior light position parking light position or the headlight position when the ignition switch is moved to the OFF position the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the exterior and interior lights after eight minutes Normal operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or when the headlight switch is turned to another position Headlights and Parking Lights Turn the end of the multi function control lever to the g first detent for parking light operation Turn to the H dlight Switch second detent for headlight operation Turn to the third PUTEM bs detent for Auto headlight operation if equipped 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Headlight System If Equipped Turn the end of the multi function control lever to the third detent to activate the automatic headlight system This system performs two functions With the engine running and the multi function control lever in the A Auto position the headlights will turn on and off based on the surrounding light levels Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your
73. gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts Ned STARTING AND OPERATING 341 CAUTION e Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle e Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold start ing and may affect drivability 81607157 ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Cap Location 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top tem could result from using an improper fuel cap off the fuel tank after filling gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting after market cap can cause the MIL Malfunction Indicator NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the Light to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from fuel tank is full the system WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near CAUTION the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled
74. have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN number Keep the PIN in a secure ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 location This number is required for dealer replacement of Fobs Duplication of Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Fob is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle Fobs with you to the dealer Customer Key Fob Programming If you have two valid sentry keys you can program new sentry keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 2 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Secur
75. in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to the next section for typical installation instructions Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and Latch Anchorages In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear outboard seating position located on the back of the seat
76. is eias eres 57 71 188 Airbag Maintenance 2 4 5 244 misongis s Raus 57 Alarm Panie 22e ee due Bae ae do dox SCR S 24 Alarm Security Alarm Alarm System Security Alarm li 20 Alignment and Balance 06 321 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio Len 250 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 040 435 Disposal occu ag ce UR sae peer Re CIRCA e 405 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 139 302 Anti Lock Warning Light lus 188 Anti Theft System 0 0 0 0 eee 20 189 Appearance Care sse 415 Assist Hill Start 2 0 ee 148 Audio Systems Radio 000 239 Auto Down Power Windows 32 Automatic Dimming Mirror 78 Automatic Door Locks llis 29 Automatic Headlights 00 126 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 260 Automatic Transmission 283 411 Adding Fluid sis esse eee 412 en INDEX 459 Fluid and Filter Changes 411 Fluid Level Check 0 411 412 Fluid Iype EO EE EE EK EK 411 Special Additives EE EE EE Ee ee 414 Torque Converter 000000008 288 Autostick cus Arnie ea qus ca Y NU eels e RAM A 285 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 169 Auxiliary Power Outlet liiis 169 RT d eme UR ee I n 395 Emergency Starting lille ess 374 Keyless
77. is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type NOTE Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors tailgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper fun
78. level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required Cooling System WARNING You or oth
79. manual for detailed operating instruc tions Clock Setting Procedure Setting the Clock 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the system is turned off Pr
80. manufacturer s instructions for mounting chains Install chains snugly and tighten after 1 2 mile 1 km of driving e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h unless otherwise specified by the chain manufacturer Drive cautiously avoiding large bumps potholes and extreme driving maneuvers TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed NOTE The Premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram STARTING AND OPERATING 323 EST FEE FRONT ES ES
81. momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained 26 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 3 U S Gallons 8 7 Liters this light will come on and remain on until fuel is added The Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again especially during and after hard braking accelerations or turns This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank Also a single chime will sound UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located on the bottom of the tachometer in the instrument cluster The EVIC consists of the following e System Status 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass Display e Outside Temperature Display e Trip Computer Functions The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Personal Settings and System Sta tus FUNCTION SELECT Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select the displayed function YES Y or NO N
82. oder apat ed 5 Warnings and Cautions sessie eass oia metase 8 Warranty Information ese Ee ee EE Ee ee 451 Washer Adding luid sess casa ateses 177 en INDEX 477 Washers Windshield 131 400 Washing Vehicle essere er gaset enese 415 Waxing and Polishing 00005 415 Wheel Alignment and Balance 321 Wheel and Wheel Trim less 417 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 417 Wheel Mounting EE EE EE EE EE eee 373 Wind Buffeting sisi ee me ete oe 33 167 Window Fogging sees 269 Windows xxu raia ea Rie iua p Cada ba are A 31 POWER u amenes donatos B atin ds dU T ata deas ds 31 Windshield Defroster 71 258 265 Windshield Washers 0 00000 ee eee 131 Fluid oe arene date RR y Ee ee OE ORE 400 Windshield Wiper Blades 400 Windshield Wipers occai raseet tenais sei aia 131 Wipers Intermittent 0000 132 Wipers Rain Sensitive 0 000 ee 133 Wiring Ignition Spark Plug Wires 392 Information Provided by DEALER
83. of Neutral NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met a CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES message will flash from the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Quadra Drive Il System If Equipped The optional Quadra Drive II System features three torque transfer couplings The couplings include ELSD Electronic Limited Slip Differential front and rear axles and Quadra Trac II transfer case The optional ELSD axles are fully automatic and require no driver input to operate Under normal driving conditions the units func tion as standard axles balancing torque evenly between left and right wheels With a traction difference between left and right wheels the coupling will sense a speed difference As one wheel begins to spin faster than the other torque will automatically transfer from the wheel that has less traction to the wheel that has traction While the transfer case and axle couplings differ in design their operation is similar Follow the Quadra Trac II transfer case shifting information preceding this section for shifting this system 2906 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advant
84. pa inini indana eee 118 Memory Seats and Radio 118 Mini Trip Computer e senses e atep aa 200 MITOS ei opie eae ne enra Roe Re eo ea a 78 Automatic Dimming 0 0 00 e eee 78 Electric Powered 0 00000 ee eee 80 Electric Remote aduana kR Eai awa aa 80 Exterior Folding ss as N ERENS een dresas tas 80 Heated iussus pues OE RE ree ASE DER 81 Outside ic retas ued 94 9 ax PERE RE ED 79 ReatVi W D 78 Vanity nn PEE 81 en INDEX 469 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Monitor Tire Pressure System 323 Mopar Paris uuu SEER dures ba Waa he ae 388 451 MP3 Player sos see sae eee crea banged bees 239 Multi Displacement Engine System 306 Multi Function Control Lever 124 Navigation Radio 0 0 0 0 Ee unes 242 Navigation System 0 0 00 ee ee ee 242 New Vehicle Break In Period 69 Occupant Restraints 0 ee ee ee 38 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 333 334 Odometer leen 192 193 TED dere ote oae Cet Ard EE 192 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 296 414 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 296 414 Oil Change Indicator 0 00 200 Oil Change Indicator Reset 200 Oil ENGINE 5o iore ma he ee et EE ces 389 Capacity reed tamale rae faeces 435 Change Interval wf sinc aged eee big wk as 390 Dipstick gcc gebr hE ERGER em se nese
85. radio has a hard drive CD s can be ripped to the hard drive and the map data comes loaded on the hard drive Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position 2 If the radio is off turn it on by pressing the ON OFF Volume radio knob 3 Press the Time soft key on the lower left side of the face of the radio 4 Press the HOUR or MIN soft keys on the face of the radio 5 The time setting will change each time you press the HOUR or MIN soft key 6 Press the SAVE soft key on the face of the radio Changing the Time Zone 1 Press the Time soft key on the lower left side of the face of the radio 2 Press the Set Time Zone soft key on the face of the radio 3 Select the appropriate time zone for your location and press the SAVE soft key to store your selection NOTE When you are traveling and enter a new
86. restraint See Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side curtain airbags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupan
87. should be drained flushed and refilled If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze coolant solution Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended antifreeze coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct antifreeze coolant type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Adding Coolant CAUTION Your vehicle has been built with an improved antifreeze coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This antifreeze coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 miles 160 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same antifreeze coolant throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for Mixing of antifreeze coolant other than the specified HOAT antifreeze coolant may result in decreased corrosion protection and engine damage If a non HOAT antifreeze coolant is introduced into the cool ing system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified antifreeze coolant as soon as pos sible using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT antifreeze coolant Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base antifreeze coolant products Do not use additional When adding antifreeze coolant rust inhibitors
88. symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Identification Number TIN located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted however the date code may only be on one side Tires with on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in
89. that only the phone book entry in the current language is deleted Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phone book entries will be deleted Note that only the phone book in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names The UConnect system will play the names of all the phone book entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the
90. the front airbags the pretensioners are a single use item After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners they must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position The manufacturer does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACCESSORY RUN posi tion engine does no
91. the other doors press the window lockout button To enable the window controls press the window lockout button again Power Window Lock Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate 81605202 Liftgate Release WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Liftgate Flipper Glass The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on the window switch located on the liftgate 81605ae9 Liftgate Glass Release To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass will automatically rise Once the liftgate flipper glass h
92. the other end on a towing dolly 4WD Models Only The manufacturer recommends towing with all four wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 7L 0 0 382 W Maintenance Procedures 389 Bl Engine Compartment 47L 00 383 Engine Qil aea eek Se he EE 389 Bl Engine Compartment 5 7L 00 0 384 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tension 392 lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 385 Spatk Plies sag Ee kie esege RE ew ES S 392 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 386 Spark Plug Wires on eese 392 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Engine Air Cleaner Filter llus 393 FOROS Hak ERAS EE AA sop Catalytic Converter is eu GE ER ER ER RE 294 393 B Replacement Parts accro eee 388 Cuanicase EE Seed ecu 395 W Dealer Service SE SS a 388 Maist nance Free ENS 305 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Air Conditioner Maintenance 397 Power Steering Fluid Check 398 Body Lubrication sircsircsirinireciaps 399 Windshield Wiper Blades 400 Windshield Washers Front And Rear 400 Exh
93. this infor mation The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure
94. this manual for more information 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When Y YES is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Y YES or N NO appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When Y YES is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Y YES or N NO appears When N NO is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Y YES or N NO appears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
95. time zone the clock must be reset manually for the new zone 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Changing Daylight Savings Time 1 Press the Time soft key on the lower left side of the face of the radio 2 Press the Daylight Savings soft key when Daylight Savings Time is in effect 3 Press the SAVE soft key on the face of the radio Press the CANCEL soft key to exit from the clock setting mode UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ radios only with UConnect For sales code REN touch screen radio refer to the separate User s Manual This feature allows you to plug in an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a connector UCI connec tor using an optional connection cable available through Mopar See your authorized dealer for details Using this feature e the iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Track Title Artist Al bum etc information display on radio e the iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e the iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Connecting the iPod Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI connector which is located in the glove box on some vehicles This location may vary with vehicle Once the iPod is c
96. to ON when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Easy Entry Exit Seat under Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Hill Start Assist To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until Y YES or N NOY appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears System Status Press and release the MENU button
97. to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nn e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension nn e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs crea
98. transfer case divides engine torque almost evenly with 48 percent of engine torque to the front axle and 52 percent of engine torque to the rear axle The Brake Traction Control System BTC which combines standard ABS and Traction Control provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction NOTE The Quadra Trac I system is not appropriate for conditions where LOW range is recommended Refer to Off Road Driving Tips in this section es STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Quadra Trac Il Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac II transfer case is fully automatic in the normal driving 4 HI mode The Quadra Trac II transfer case provides three mode positions four wheel drive high range neutral and four wheel drive low range This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4 HI mode This transfer case divides engine torque almost evenly with 48 percent of engine torque to the front axle and 52 percent of engine torque to the rear axle When speed differences are increased between the front and rear drive shafts the transfer case can transmit up to 100 percent of available engine torque to the front or rear drive shafts When additional traction is required the 4 LOW position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed The 4 LOW position is intended for loose slippery
99. until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC e System OK e System Warnings Displayed Will display all currently active System Warnings 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Tire Pressure Monitor System Shows the current pressure of all 4 road tires For additional information refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Section 5 of this manual TIRE St me 34 es iue i Tire Pressure Display NOTE Tires heat up during normal driving conditions Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer to Tire Inflation Pressures in Section 5 for additional information NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the
100. vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up Improper installation can lead to failure of an to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often infant or child restraint It could come loose in a have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing collision The child could be badly injured or direction than infant carriers do so they can be used killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 actly when installing an infant or child restraint Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of A rearward facing infant restraint should only be child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage restraint in the front seat may be struck by a system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage deploying passenger airbag which may cause se System in this section vere or fatal injury to the infant 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards The manufacturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight
101. vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately 1 minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers and Washers in this section for more information NOTE When your headlights come on during the daytime the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Instru ment Panel and Interior Lights below for setting the instrument panel lights to full daytime intensity SmartBeams If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward light ing at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 NOTE If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is re placed the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Select
102. vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam age to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 inches The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 inches and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave ef fects Maximum speed in 20 inches of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami nated Contaminated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent component damage 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Driving In Snow Mud and Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional c
103. warning threshold NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors moun
104. will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Recommended Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into N Neutral and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operat
105. will reduce the possibility of window fogging es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature Control and Manual This means the customer can over ride the blower mode and disable automatic temperature control completely NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart below for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME The System will Mode Air Temperature Air Recirculation AIC Operation How Blower Control Control Control Control Operation Full Automatic Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Operation Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature be overridden knobs for Comfort Blower Preferred Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for Comfort Mode Preferred and Set mode knob to any desired Automatic Although Manual Manual automatic User selectable User selectable Manual Air Temperature air delivery point Adjust Auto Lo or Hi can be control of air temperature outside or A C on or off Control Temperature knobs to select selected a manually is disabled User must recir
106. with graphic e WASHER FLUID LOW with graphic e COOLANT LOW with graphic e OIL CHANGE REQUIRED e OIL CHANGE RESET e CHECK GAUGES e AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON e AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF PARK ASSIST DISABLED SERVICE SUSPENSION SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURE SERVICE 4WD SYSTEM 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING LIMIT SPEED CHECK GASCAP ESP OFF IOD FUSE OUT HILL DESCENT CONTROL MEMORY 1 POSITIONS SET ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 MEMORY 2 POSITIONS SET MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED SEATBELT BUCK LED with graphic MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN PARK DRIVER 1 MEMORY DRIVER 2 MEMORY ADJ PEDALS DISABLED CRUISE CONTROL SET ADJ PEDALS DISABLED SHIFTER IN REVERSE TIRE LOW PRESSURE CHECK TPM SYSTEM LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System Only RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only SPARE LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System es um UNLOCK TO OPERATE Power Liftgate Models Only PUT IN PARK TO OPERATE Power Liftgate Models Only FUNCTION DISABLED Power Liftgate Models Only CLOSE LIFTGLASS Power Liftgate Models Only OBSTACLE DETECTED Power Liftgate Models Only MANUAL CLOSE TO OPERATE Power Liftgate Models Only 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Engine Oil Change Indicator Sy
107. with other vehicles so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read this manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particu larly those used for braking steering and transmission and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload it or expect it to overcome the laws of nature Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Be sure to read On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Section 5 of this manual This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the veh
108. you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and seat belt retractor assem bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Enhanced Accident Response Feature If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically The hazard lights will flash and the fuel will be cut off to the engine In addition after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility and remain lit until the ignition switch is turned off NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Maintaining Your Airbag System NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste WARNING perchlorate B e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could Airbag Warning Light cause it to fail when you need it You could be You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate injured if the airbag system is not there to protect for your protection in an impact The airbag system is you Do not modify the components or wiring designed to be maintenance free If any of the following 14 including adding any kind of badges or stickers to occurs have an authorized dealer service the system the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper r
109. 0 102 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445 Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Replace the side row of spark plugs 4 7L Only 102 000 170 000 102 Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter 120 000 200 000 120 Ls accessory drive belt s 3 7L 4 7L 5 7L En 120 000 200 000 120 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Information Provided by DEALER IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your E Reporting Safety Defects 5 451 Vehicle iudex ET OE ex RO 448 Ee EE E E 452 Prepare For The Appointment 1 een 448 Bl Publication Order Forms l l 452 Prepare A istesede ee ee eee ARS 448 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Be Reasonable With Requests 448 Quality Grades ss oie ret Rm 454 H If You Need Assistance 000005 448 Treadwear sees Bl Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 451 Traction Grades 0 00000 sn la Mo
110. 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner manual INTRODUCTION 7 a RO DU Des Ja Eie ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULA HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE WIPER INTERMITTENT FAILURE OUTLET Low PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE mm g 3 d se l af O T EA T BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTERLIGHTING LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE UPPERANDLOWER HEATEDSEAT WINDOWLIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILL DESCENT WARNING PARKING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE S CIO y scan Z lt AWD 1 H Cv T FUELFILLSIDE REARWINDOW WINDSHIELD WASHER DOMELIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWERAIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET A WINDOW DOWN CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM Hi 3 2005 Ot any MA
111. 108 333 Glass Cleaning os cede ba ee ed 418 Gross Axle Weight Rating 347 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 346 nn INDEX 465 GV WRe EE ER EE WAR RR aoe Ee 344 Hands Free Phone UConnect 82 Hard Drive HDD 000005 239 Hazard Warning Flasher 366 Head Restraints srt erara oE a E aA 110 Head Rests taming u mia eee eee 110 Headlights ee ee nd ia ee ee ee ee ee 125 Bulb Replacement EE EE EE EE ee 428 ER AE ES E PER a s 418 On With Wipers a a aaan aaa EE EE Ee ee 126 Replacing cedere ERAS EER ERIS PELA 428 Heated Mirrors 00000 81 Heated Seats SR RR ER RE ERA 111 Heater Engine Block liliis 280 High Beam Indicator 000000 187 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 129 Hill Descent Control Hill Start Assist eee eee 148 Hitches Trailer TOWing icem 350 Holder Cup seeks Saee i ere Sin ote 172 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 159 Hood Release llis 123 lh PTT 406 TEMON ou iaceo ere ah RE des ER e ia 16 Cables Spark Plug Wires 392 AR duced a EE EE d RA 14 16 Wiring System Spark Plug Wires 392 Ignition Key Removal se ee 16 Illaminated Entty iei ee Pad ead ses 21 Immobilizer Sentry Key 2005 17 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 0 00 eee eee 60 61 Inflation Pressure Tires 00 3
112. 16 Information Center Vehicle 05 195 Inside Rearview Mirror leeren 78 Instrument Cluster 466 INDEX MM Instrument Panel and Controls 185 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 418 Integrated Power Module Fuses 425 Interior Appearance Care liliis 417 Interior Fuses lien 419 Interior Lighting 0 0 eee eee 130 Interior Lights 000 127 130 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 132 Introduction se RR Rg MR anr DEd EE ye GR EI 4 Inverter POW f etse Re sp we a E AE 170 Jack Location da dan ere SR RR ER RR SR eae 368 Jack Operation esee b RR daa nes 368 371 Jacking Instructions llli 371 Jump Starting 6442 40 ee Re rae es 374 Key Programming lt sa ss as ee ee Rs 19 Key Replacement ee EES Pose ee 18 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 17 Key In Remindet cese ca ie RR cee es 17 Keyless Entry System tac agua ae baw e 21 I T 14 Lap Shoulder Belts 000 39 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for Children ss ER gee RR ee esas Ab RE 64 65 Lead Free Gasoline 0 0 00 eee 333 Leaks Fluid ze ERR REG E ER 72 Life of Tires arruas aea bo Re De A EXER 320 Fi iR eee ee emey gai 34 Liftgate Flipper Glass llle 35 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 176 Lighter oe ry dud ES 72 124 Airbag cuu Debe pea raii E aai 57 188 AlI S ces deities Barw
113. 24 Front Heated Seats If Equipped 111 Battery Saver Feature Exterior Interior 40 20 40 Second Row Folding Seat 113 Lights iix Rx Race 125 Headlights And Parking Lights 125 Automatic Headlight System If Equipped 126 SmartBeams If Equipped 126 Instrument Panel And Interior Lights 127 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 128 Lights On Reminder sess 128 Fog Lights If Equipped 128 T rtiSienals ove cu wie ahs vett Re rs 129 High Beam Switch lssn 129 Passing Light ccecce epe Res 129 Headlight Time Delay 129 Interior Lights 4 4 4 iren ect dn 130 Courtesy Reading Lights 130 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 131 Bi Tilt Telescoping Steering Column ll Adjustable Pedals If Equipped ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System 132 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 133 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 136 Electronic Speed Control Operation 136 TO Activate accep rare ane rdc e nra 137 To Set At A Desired Speed 137 To Deactivate sac nee i mte Gia aes 138 To Resume Speed ss esie dse eiiean E 138 To Vary The Spe
114. 358 1 Air Outlet 5 Upper Switch Bank 9 Lower Switch Bank 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 10 Climate Controls 3 Radio 7 Storage Bin 11 Ignition Switch 4 Glove Box 8 Power Outlet 12 Storage Bin 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 819e550f INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 2 Brake Warning Light The BRAKE warning light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and stay on briefly as a bulb check If the bulb does not come on during starting have the bulb re paired promptly If the light stays on longer it may be an indication that the parking brake has not been released BRAKE OE If the light remains on when the parking brake is off it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or low fluid level In this case the Brake Warning Light will remain on until the cause is corrected If a brake malfunction is indicated immediate repair is necessary and continued operation of the vehicle in this condition is dangerous UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 3 Turn Signal Indicator Light The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indi
115. 432 Rear Tail oase PER dh dow ae LUE Sup 432 Seat Belt Reminder sls 193 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 189 SEVICE s ous eh edo OE PR eae RUN ee ee 8 428 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 187 Side Market ER RE SR Re UR ERR US 8 432 SmartBeams ii se se Ga ey ER ed ES UP dn 126 468 INDEX MM Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 190 Tow Haul Indicator s s 192 Traction Control llle 152 189 Turn Signal isse mtn 124 129 430 432 Vanity Minton sa cioe UP RAUS RUE eie 81 Voltage is bo em eme C mee oe ace e s aos 195 Load Floor Cargo asera ee 174 Loading Vehicle EE EE eee siiis 344 En AE AE EE EO IE SE Ung 311 LOCKS zu ape qr BE aa A CA AC Ge EE 28 Automatic Door llle 29 Child Protection 0 0 00 cee eee ae 30 DOOP ARE EK EE eed aoe em RE 28 Power DOOF SE ges BEER SEE Ae 29 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH 2 acace ee Oe Re ewes rode ces Oe 64 65 Lubrication Body ee EE EE EE sts 399 Luggage Rack Roof Rack ee EE EE ee 177 Lumbar Support acc vi ie Be eg Rm RES 109 Maintenance Free Battery ee ee ee neasi 395 Maintenance Procedures sis Ee 389 Maintenance Schedule LL 440 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 187 386 Manual Service llle 452 Master Cylinder Brakes 04 408 Memory Feature Memory Seat 118 Memory Seat encinas
116. AND OPERATING 299 Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case to AWD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for acc
117. American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity 3 7L 4 7L 5 7L Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Compartment illustration in this section ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 NOTE Vehicles equipped with a 5 7L engine must use SAE 5W 20 oil Failure to do so may result in improper operation of the Multiple Displacement System MDS Refer to Multi Displacement System in Section 5 for more details Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired b
118. Attach vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar 13 Release parking brake CAUTION Transmission damage may occur if the transmission is shifted into P Park with the transfer case in N Neutral and the engine running With the transfer case in N Neutral ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into P Park refer to steps 7 8 above Shifting Out Of Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Depress brake pedal 2 Turn the ignition key ON engine off 3 Shift transmission into N Neutral 4 Shift transfer case out of N Neutral 362 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Hold down N Neutral pin switch with a pen etc for 4 seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress Lamp will stop blinking go out when shift is complete The 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will no longer be displayed on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual Neutral Switch 5 Shift transmission into P Park 6 Start the engine 7 Shift transmission into D Drive en STARTING AND OPERATING 363 NOTE When shifting out of transfer case N Neutral turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear CAUTION clash WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the SNOW PLOW vehicle waa del wiih the t
119. Bog LICKS deese aci tee em Res 128 194 431 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 113 HO 464 INDEX aa Folding Rear 5 dt i e RR 113 117 Four Wheel Drive 2 000000 0 ee 290 Operation ORR OE OE EG 290 SYSTEMS d hots Hier os bede do d eR HR Eb 290 Four Wheel Drive Operation 290 Four Way Hazard Flasher 366 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 004 289 Front Axle Differential esses 410 Front Heated Seats llle 11 Eu l e TE bate ee ET 333 Filler Cap Gas Cap 0 sirrg 341 Gasoline n sos TE sd eb SE exer ERREUR 333 ei EE ETE EE 194 FOSES reacts EE cna 407 Materials Added 000005 336 Octane Rating vss cies aise dele ans aie eR s 333 334 Requirements s ss 2498 6 tae Gad eh ak ees 435 System HOSES as sie ae oe ke Rae god ee 407 Tank Capacity Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel System Caution 336 342 343 FUSES EE EEN OR RE ee 419 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 159 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 341 343 386 Gasoline Fuel ees 333 Gasoline Reformulated 334 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 335 Gauges Coolant Temperature lille 191 E el eR EE OO le Ah ges 194 Speedometer eid ed eh ore det 187 Tachometer seen 189 Gear Ranges iek EER RR diam dt EH ea hn 283 General Information 20 26
120. Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button while a callis in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 hold may not become active
121. Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play lll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play ll Sales Code REN Multimedia System If Equipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure ll Sales Code RER AM FM CD DVD Radio With Navigation System If Equipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Clock Setting Procedure 243 ll Universal Consumer Interface UCI Hf Equipped sa e pes acp pex ee adam Eng 244 Connecting The iPod ee ee 245 Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons 245 Play Mode erisir eb eR RR RR EER Be 245 List Or Browse Mode
122. Display Public Public No program type or un None Rhythm and Blues R amp B defined Religious Music Rel Musc Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft College College Soft Rock Soft Rck Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40 News News Weather Weather 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
123. EGRATED RESERVOIR CENTER CYLINDER POWER MODULE BATTERY 81c3e3e2 AIR CLEANER COOLANT ENGINE ENGINE OIL WINDSHIELD FILTER PRESSURE CAP OIL FILL DIPSTICK WASHER RESERVOIR ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L AUTOMATIC FUSES COOLANT ENGINE OIL FUSES POWER BRAKE FLUID TRANSMISSION INTEGRATED BOTTLE DIPSTICK DIPSTICK DISTRIBUTION CENTER RESERVOIR POWER MODULE AIR CLEANER COOLANT ENGINE WASHER FLUID BATTERY FILTER PRESSURE CAP OIL FILL BOTTLE B1c4955e 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L ENGINE COOLANT TRANSMISSION POWER DISTRIBUTION BRAKE MASTER INTEGRATED RESERVOIR DIPSTICK CENTER CYLINDER POWER MODULE AIR CLEANER ENGINE ENGINE ENGINE OIL WINDSHIELD FILTER COOLANT CAP OIL FILL DIPSTICK WASHER RESERVOIR BATTERY 8127826f ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technici
124. F YOUR VEHICLE 157 Cleaning the Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could damage the sensors REAR CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Vehicles with a Navigation radio may be equipped with a rear view camera located on the rear liftgate that allows you to see an on screen image on the navigation radio screen of the rear of your vehicle whenever the vehicle is put into R Reverse WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the rear camera system Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind spots before backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens Clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Turning the Rear Camera On 1 To access the rear camera mode select Rear Camera at the Systems Settings screen and press ENTER Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The overhead console contains an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses and optional power sunroof switches 2 Select ON at the Rear Came
125. HOAT antifreeze coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present Components should be replaced immedi ately if there is any evidence of degradation that could cause failure Fuel System Connections Electroni
126. ING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away A beeping signal will sound two seconds before the liftgate starts to open or close ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 NOTE If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position The power liftgate must be in the full open position for any of the buttons to operate If the liftgate is not fully open press the remote keyless entry transmitter to fully open the liftgate and then press again to close If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 22 F 30 C or temperatures above 150 F 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the li
127. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the gear selector rhythmically between D Drive and R Reverse while applying slight pressure to the accelerator NOTE The Electronic Stability Program ESP and Traction Control if equipped should be turned OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Section 3 of this manual The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Racing the engine or spinning the wheels due to the frustration of not freeing the vehicle may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the engine to idle with the transmission 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME selector in N Neutral for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheat ing and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between First and R Reverse do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Quadra Trac I Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped The Quadra Trac I is a single speed HI range only transfer case which provides convenient full time 4 wheel drive No driver interaction is required This
128. Key Replacement 18 Service Assistance 1 0 eee eee eee 448 Service Contract x owas EER ILE cs 450 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Iridicato iss se ea BEER EDE BR ER Hea ES 187 Service Manuals 0 eee eee 452 Setting the Clock 0 213 229 240 243 Settings Personal ss ise eder E eas 205 Shift Lock Manual Override 281 Shif hg EE eed ERES rd E i 281 Automatic Transmission Ls 281 Shoulder Belts su iii ga EE 9 39 Signals T tn ese RE RR 129 187 430 432 Skylights Command View 168 SImartBedms ansa suce prd hera Edda deba 126 Snow Chains Tire Chains 322 Snow PIOW ssa cee Re 9 RI anes 363 Sound Systems Radio ee ee ee ee ee 239 Spare Tir oi te SA EE DR dido 369 Spark Plug Wires Ignition Cables Wires 392 Spark Ples s voie eam tems 392 Specifications Fuel Gasoline leeren 333 Oll consc edie desde ceeded eens Res 390 Speed Control Cruise Control 136 speedometer ideas rrik RARO SK E TS 187 ders baal ed dona ce ahaa PEU a ded 277 Automatic Transmission les 277 Cold Weather llle 278 280 Engine Block Heater ees se ee 280 Engine Fails to Start 474 INDEX ME Remote seene ace qoem HER OE OE ee aes 26 Steering POWER ose T ge eo E E oe ENE RE 305 398 Tilt Colum i222 dk eae EE Oa 134 Wheel Dt anne EE REED RR ceri ER
129. LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s second row seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint withou
130. M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals NOTE Vehicles built with the 4 7L engine are equipped with sixteen spark plugs one set is located on the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is located on the side of the engine The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard plug and must be change every 30 000 miles 50 000 km The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a premium plug and must be changed every 102 000 miles 170 000 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443 Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 6 000 10 000 6 Rotate tires 6 000 10 000 6 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner 12 000 20 000 12 filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 12 000 20 000 12 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent 18 000 30 000 18 trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Perfo
131. Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in es STARTING AND OPERATING 309 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A
132. ORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are de signed to activate only in certain side or rollover collisions When the Occupant Restraint Control Mod ule ORC detects a collision requiring the window bags to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle both sides of the vehicle if equipped with rollover sensing A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the window bag The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates This especially applies to chil dren The window bag is only about 3 inches 8 cm thick when it is inflated en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module detects a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the sy
133. Off or set the time interval 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Lights The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights mounted below the instrument panel an overhead console light assembly which contains both driver and passenger reading lights reading lights located above the rear doors and a rear cargo light Opening a door or turning the center of the multi function control lever to the extreme up position will activate all interior courtesy lights Courtesy Reading Lights 816060c7 Each light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area TEES of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area Courtesy Reading Lights of the lens a second time There are also reading lights located above the rear doors Each light can be turned on by pressing the front recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the lens a second time es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The front and rear wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the right side control lever Turn the end of the control lever to select Lo Hi or one of the five speed sensitive intermittent windshield wiper speeds Refer to Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System in this section For information on the rear wiper and washer refer to Rear Window Features in this section Windshield Wiper Washer Switch NOTE A
134. R 34 34 81971362 TIRE 35 PSI If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios STARTING AND OPERATING 331 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON a chime to sound a Low Pressure message to appear 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ME in the EVIC and the graphic display will still show the low tire pressure value flashing Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will t
135. R VEHICLE 63 is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for chil dren who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to
136. R1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the Audio Select button If Equipped 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the 4 digit country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default audio language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default subtitle language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a langu
137. S set od chads ood oes geod weds 70 Satellite Radio 008 239 240 243 249 Satellite Radio Antenna llle 250 Schedule Maintenance 0005 440 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 00000 eee 71 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0 00 cee ene 46 Seat BEIS uua Ree doe Se ee ea 39 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 44 And Pregnant Women 04 47 Child Restraint ae ae AR ER C ees 60 67 Extender iu db dre dee dE Es 48 Front Seat i404 sekere dad x ger ek S EET 39 Inspection eese eee eee Eee EER 71 Maintenance neces gale VERE ua BS Dao 71 419 Pretensioners llle 46 Reminders iis sd Ee ER HE nek aed dads A 193 Shoulder Belt Anchorage sees ee ee 44 Seats i423 axa Ow ca EU ey Gln Cae enh wie EE 108 Adjustment sees 108 Cleaning oh nude sce SEE eset zoo oe ty he 417 Easy Entty eps ke ese Pie deer 122 Fold and Tumble Rear LL 113 Head Restraints llle 110 Heated 4 ss aea ace deed 111 Lumbar Support 0 0 00004 109 IMemoOty ccce ee ma dc ak RR an a i sl ROR RO Ros a 118 oe EE EER E E RUE 110 en INDEX 473 Rear Folding 2 2 os eoe wade we on 113 117 Reclining ies ate d eee rM s 108 Seatback Release llle 117 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 20 189 selection OF Oll ass ae BREER BEER HER RE ER 390 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 17 Sentry Key Programming 000 19 Sentry
138. SE PANEL Interior Fuses The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to the left of the steering column 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use Mopar Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue Fuse Panel 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cav Cartridge Min Fuse Description Cav Cartridge Mini Fuse Description ity Fuse ity Fuse 1 30 Amp Audio Amp B 9 20 Amp Pwr Outlet B Green Yellow 2 15 Amp Sunroof B 10 10 Amp Final Drive Control Blue Red Module FDCM 3 10 Amp Htd Mirror EBL Heater Ventilation Air Red Conditioning HVAC Switch Bank Transfer 4 Amp Rr Pwr Out B Case Switch O H ellow 6 Heater Ventilation Air 5 10Amp Rr HVAC R O Conditioning HVAC Red Commander Only Relay Rear Park As 6 Spare B sist 7 20 Amp Door Locks B 11 Spare B Yellow 12 10Amp Door Mods Mem Sw 8 15 Amp Steer Col Lock B Red O H Lamps IP Cour Blue ELV tesy Lamps Glove Box Lamp B ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
139. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS E INTRODUCTION eek ex m Uer giese ees Res ee e See RR ee eh ORE E T ea E S 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE se see sesse esse hn 8 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE esse sesse sees mnn Mm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL es see ss sees sees sees sees see esse 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 0 cece cece reece esse esse es see esse htt e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ss ee see sesse esse esse esse esse sesse esse es sees 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE oos se esse ees sees sees se esse hh hh esse esse n MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ss ees sees sees sesse se esse esse esse es see ees sees 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ss ee ese esse esse esse sesse esse esse ee 10 MERE MIE N RO EI EE EG Information Provided by DEALER INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction 0 000 000 0000 4 Bl Warnings And Cautions 00 8 Mi Rollover Warning ee ee rid eee 5 Bi Vehicle Identification Number aoaaa 8 Bl How To Use This Manual 6 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both on road and off road use It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive vehicles were not intended However on road ride and handling will have a different feel from what drivers experience
140. Sense feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Pro grammable Features in Section 4 of this manual The rain sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the rain sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Transmission in N Neutral Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the N Neutral position the rain sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the N Neutral position TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column ru um Tilt Steering Column To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as de sired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inwa
141. Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Saving Feature Protection 125 Belts Drive lee 392 Belts Seat ved ace baee b e Rp RAT E PT 39 Body Mechanism Lubrication 399 B Pillar Location lessen 311 Brake Assist System Ee EE ee Ee cae 141 Brake Control System Electronic 139 Brake System ee Kak a o ed Roe Ke Red 407 Anti Lock ABS 0 0 000000 139 302 ole RR OE OT TER ERA 408 Master Cylinder i s sis ger bte ninata 408 Parkit gezos EE BR ED ME ei pd 300 Warning Light i e rure We ea Ee 187 Brake Transmission Interlock 283 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 69 Bulb Replacement 0000004 427 428 Calibration Compass 0 000006 204 Camera Rear llle 157 Capacities Pluid cols per RPG 435 Caps Filler Eel ceto E esrb ex Dad e RUE ee 341 Radiator Coolant Pressure 404 Car Washes ss iq ve qr pua Sh eke Oo Sone Carbon Monoxide Warning Cargo Area Features sac sca be a 460 INDEX MM Cargo Compartment 000000 174 Luggage Carte sie WER RR ES We ER Ree ao 177 Cargo Load Floor esee temen 174 Catalytic Converter 2 0 393 CD Compact Disc Player 239 Cellular Phone ides He aces Rx 82 Center High Mounted Stop Light 434 Certification Label llle 344 Chains Tite sux BE 4r c ER HERDER 322 Chang
142. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 NOTE Proper aim and adjustments of the front fog lights should be made to prevent excessive glare for other drivers Turn Signals Move the multi function control lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down Turn Signal Auto Mode Tap the multi function control lever once and the turn signal left or right will flash 3 times and automatically turn off High Beam Switch Push the multi function control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever to wards you to switch the headlights back to low beam Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multi function control lever toward the steering wheel This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Headlight Time Delay There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle lights for 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight delay the multi function control lever must be rotated to the Off position after the ignition switch is turned OFF Only the headlights will illuminate during this time Refer to EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 to turn this feature On
143. Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To access a lighted vanity mirror flip down one of the visors Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on automatically UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Lighted Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Extension If Equipped This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for increased coverage 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER radio contains an inte grated Hands Free Communication UConnect sys tem Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for this ra dio UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See UConnect website for sup ported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following web sites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect
144. a stSystem css seien BIER S 401 Cooling System 6 0 eee eee 401 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 406 Fuel System Connections suus 407 Brake Systeri cus ates Win eu eater vere oe dps 407 Front Rear Axle Fluid 00 410 Transfer Case 2 cc sa sre es 410 Automatic Transmission ee 411 Maintenance After Off Road Driving 414 Appearance Care And Protection From COLrrOSiON 4 3 4 fsa eis So Sa hue der E Nes 415 W Fuse Panel 2222 m RR Res 419 Interior PUSS ss ER e race 3 pae a a 419 Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center nues ex Ba SEP YE E Ege 422 Underhood Fuses Integrated Power MEE s eso derat dpa tepida RE 425 W Vehicle Storage i i RR RIA 426 Wi Replacement Bulbs 00005 427 W Bulb Replacement suse do reap wes 428 Head Light sss cu 3 skiecnependiegnks 428 Front Turn Signal ess s c e ey eed 430 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Front Fog Light oa emere IR oe aes 431 Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 436 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Back Up Engines d ds vad sig RR Eu gia E eae e 436 FABRI Sere ab ius rgd Rees sitne i is se RR N N EN 437 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 434 ll Fluids And Capacities 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L ENGINE COOLANT POWER DISTRIBUTION BRAKE MASTER INT
145. a finger into each hole of the headlamp cover and pull upward to unsnap the rear edge of the cover from the two upper lamp mounting brackets Slide the cover rearward to disengage the front edge from beneath the tab on the top near the front of the lamp housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector 4 Turn the low or high beam bulb 1 4 turn counter clockwise to unlock it from the housing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 5 Pull the bulb and base straight out from the opening in the reflector CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 81bd52d0 1 Low Beam Bulb 2 High Beam Bulb 3 Front Park Turn Signal Bulb 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Turn Signal 3 Reach through the access hole to access the park turn 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left or right diia BOCREEOR Tne bote of Si OUT TERES mik 2 Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel to unsnap and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield Access to the bulb can be gained through the wheel liner hole 81bd52d0 1 Low Beam Bulb 2 High Beam Bulb 3 Front Park Turn Signal Bulb es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 4 Turn the socket on the bottom of the front lamp unit housing 1 4 turn counter
146. a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Alignment will not correct this problem See your autho adequate speed capability can result in sudden rized dealer for proper diagnosis tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Vehicle pull to right or left 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and avoid tire cupping and spotty wear TIRE CHAINS Only models fitted with 235 65R17XL extra load tires have sufficient tire to body clearance to allow use of tire chains Install chains on rear tires only Follow these recommendations to guard against damage and exces sive tire and chain wear e Do not install tire chains or traction devices on ve hicles with larger than 235 65R17XL size tires Tires larger than this may not provide sufficient body clearance with chains or other traction devices e Manufacturer recommends a cold inflation pressure of 38 psi 262 kPa when using 235 65R17XL size tires for this vehicle e Use SAE class S tire chains or traction devices only e Follow tire chain
147. able winch mechanism To remove or stow NS the spare use the jack handle to rotate the spare tire drive nut The nut is located under a plastic cover at the center rear of the cargo floor area just inside the liftgate opening CAUTION Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism Lowering Raising Spare Tire Spare Tire Removal Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut Use the Lug Wrench to rotate the nut counter clockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow to pull the tire out from under the vehicle 370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE CAUTION WARNING The winch mechanism is designed for use with the Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off other power tools is not recommended and can dam the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack age the winch or changing the wheel When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher cable and pull it through the center of the wheel e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake a
148. ach feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To
149. adiator cap unless checking for antifreeze coolant freeze point or replacing antifreeze coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional antifreeze coolant is needed to main tain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot antifreeze coolant to enter the radiator 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check antifreeze coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze coolant needs to be added contents of coolant recov ery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent antifreeze coolant additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain antifreeze coolant concentration at 50
150. age not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between subtitle OFF or ON ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the menu button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Radio Mode Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory p
151. age of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2 wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS NOTE Prior to off road driving remove the front air dam to prevent damage The front air dam is attached to the lower front fascia with quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand When To Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped When off road driving shift to WD LOW for additional traction This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water es STARTING AND OPERATING 297 CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new
152. aimlerChrysler Corpora tion to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation DaimlerChrysler Corporation product involving a 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable lamp status if equipped Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire pressure monitoring system status Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in
153. allic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings For the most accurate compass performance the compass variance must be set using the following procedure NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC p 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the compass button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in P Park Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set COMPASS VARIANCE MAP tings displays in the EVIC 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of three lan g
154. an in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Refer to Section 4 of this manual Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened This message may be temporarily overridden by pressing either the C T STEP or MENU buttons However after one minute of no customer interaction the EVIC will display again the CHECK GASCAP message The message will remain displayed until the vehicle diagnos tic system can retest the fuel system The test will perform the next time the vehicle is started if the vehicle was keyed off above 40 F 4 C outside temperature and the following vehicle sta
155. and movement inside of the vehicle When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn will sound repeatedly for three minutes and the headlights and taillights will flash for an addi tional 15 minutes To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed a red light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the system is arming During this 16 second pre arm period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming If the system successfully arms the red light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set A manual lock of the doors either with ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 the door lock plunger located on the inside of the doors or with the driver s door key lock cylinder will not set the alarm To Disarm the System To disarm the system use the remote keyless entry transmitter If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter once the
156. and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Use the Tune Control Knob to scroll through the entries Push the Audio Select button to select an entry and make changes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu If Equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between gt ll playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button If Equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc If Equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc If Equipped e Angle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc If Equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF If Equipped e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls If Equipped e VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change mode of either the I
157. anges from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open amp close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open amp close the door
158. as been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8
159. as been opened connec tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass is open WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter Press the button on the remote keyless entry transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is fully open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate Also the power liftgate may be closed by pressing a button located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening Pressing once will close the liftgate only This button cannot be used to open the liftgate When the remote keyless entry transmitter button is pressed two times and the Lamp Flash feature is enabled the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing NOTE e In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift gate trim panel WARN
160. ate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Tether Strap Mounting Route the tether strap over the seat back and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 For the outboard seating positions route the tether over the head rests and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately d
161. ated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates drivi
162. ated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phone book entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voicemail systems have system timeout settings too short that may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding
163. ated on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equip ment NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN label ee INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS om Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death Information Provided by DEALER THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS MA Word About Your Keys 0 14 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 14 FOB With Integrated Key FOBIK 15 Ignition Key Removal lesus 16 Key In Ignition Reminder 17 a oy Key nic he ts Kee RI TE RO HONO 17 Replacement Keys as s ia 24a eee ye 18 Customer Key FOB Programming 19 General Information 005 20 N Security Alarm System If Equipped 20 To Set The Alafm seure r aa sean ad wale ea 20 To Disarm The System 00 0 21 N Wiuminated Entry i e Rm n 21 Bl Remote Keyless Entry 0 0005 21 To Unlock The Doors
164. automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Read
165. awp srake WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REARFOGLANP ANDLIFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOURWHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE as m rria 9 mb 3l i ae TOW LJ HAUL VOICE BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIRCONDITIONING __ CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON FYN F er 2 i OR 60 pr Em LOW LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDINGDOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANDTETHERFOR UGONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE Low C B ES d ss am bo i MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S 8191e970 INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO Li 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on a label loc
166. ay open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer 452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Wash ington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshoot
167. bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and occupant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEF
168. ble from your dealer is recommended es STARTING AND OPERATING 279 If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce WARNING dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this ding serious perso 10 occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic repeat the normal starting procedure m transmission cannot be started this way Unburned CAUTION fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump startin
169. brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal R Reverse Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Shift into N Neutral when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with selector lever in N Neutral can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual D Drive Shift into D Drive only when the vehicle is at a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The D Drive position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select
170. braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 WARNING WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping the natural laws of physics from acting on the makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition stop of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns foll
171. btain service For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Fob with Integrated Key and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unau thorized vehicle operation Therefore only Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The sy
172. c Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are designed with tubes and special connects connections and clamps which have unique material characteristics to provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio rated gasoline You are urged to use only the manufactures specified tubes connections and clamps or their equivalent in material and specification in any fuel system servicing Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for suggested service intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake and Power Steering System Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses for evidence of heat and me chanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling suggest deteriora tion of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Ofte
173. c transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in N Neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing 2WD Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage Towing Quadra Trac Single Speed Transfer Case 4WD Models Recreational towing is not allowed This model does not have a N Neutral position in the transfer case Towing Quadra Trac II Quadra Drive Il 4WD Models CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or
174. cator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 4 High Beam Indicator Light E Indicates that headlights are on high beam 5 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system En called OBD II that monitors engine and auto matic transmission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 6 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on t during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 7 Anti Lock Brake Warning Light S This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake
175. clockwise to unlock it 5 Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the opening in the housing 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 7 Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Fog Light 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left or right 2 Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel to unsnap and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield Access to the bulb can be gained through the wheel liner hole 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Reach through the access hole to access the back of the front fog light housing on the back of the front fascia 4 Disconnect the electrical connector 5 Turn the socket on the back of the housing 1 4 turn counter clockwise to unlock it 6 Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the opening in the housing 7 Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Back Up Lights 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two push pins that secure the rear lamp u
176. compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 811adOdO Tire Placard Location STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Tire and Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRO THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS NEVER EXCEED XXX KG T125 70D15 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RA 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 3 the tire size designed
177. cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication of damage which could result in belt failure Low gen erator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no inter ference between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New spark plugs should be installed at the specified mileage The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for spark plug information Spark Plug Wires The spark plug wires should be kept clean and properly connected Terminals should be fully seated Cracked damaged or faulty wires should be replaced en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter change intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Catalytic Converter The catalytic co
178. creen Display 1 2 3 4 5 D Actual Gear s 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 5 Allowed Applies to vehicles equipped with 4 7L 5 7L engines only 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive 5th gear for 3 7L engine 4th and 5th gears for 4 7L and 5 7L engines The transmission will automatically shift from direct gear to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the transmission selector is in D Drive e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal operating tempera ture NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the Note under torque converter clutch later in this section During cold temperature operation you may notice de layed upshifts depending on engine and transm
179. ct system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Emergency En9lish Phonebook edia A e mergenc Espanol oneboo Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Setup Phonebook Flowchart Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Y at a time Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Enter Number Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Prompts UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Setup Confirmation will Engl
180. ction When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a Wf year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Blades The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Washers Front and Rear On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC the low washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the Washer Fluid Low message will be displayed The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid
181. ctured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri ous injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHAN NELS Release the buttons when the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 3 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the EVIC display ch
182. culated the desired temperature selected airflow level adjust temperature is reccommend for knobs to obtain the the optimum comfort desired temperature Full Manual Set blower knob to any desired Manual Manual Manual automatic User selectable User selectable Operation airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Adjust Temperature knobs to select the desired temperature control of air temperature is disabled User must adjust temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature outside or recirculated A C on or off Manual Air Temperature Control Operation When the Mode knob is set to any position other than Auto the Temperature knob operates in the non automatic comfort condition The numbers on the Temperature dial are no longer valid in this mode This mode allows the user to select any desired air temperature When the temperature knob is in full conterclockwise position the air temperature will be Cooler As the knob is rotated clockwise the temperature will increase gradually until the knob reaches the full clockwise position 817dd45b ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 NOTE Regardless of the type of operation when a temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full counterclockwise position the system will deliver full hot or full cold air out of the ducts respectively The operator can override the AUTO
183. d CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Maintenance Sched ule Refer to Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in
184. ders Second Row Seat Cup Holders Third Row Seat 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sa CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Load Floor The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic lined tray which holds a variety of items The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches In order to use the cargo load floor use the following procedure Rear Storage Cover NOTE The cargo load floor latches should not be used as cargo tie downs 1 Flip up pull loop s so they are perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 2 Pull up on loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are 4 Pull up on loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are parallel to the slotted hole in tray perpendicular straight up to the slotted hole in tray 3 Lift tray over loop s and reposition tray 5 Push loop s back down so they are parallel to the top of the tray Cargo Load Floor 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer A switch on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch up to the DEL Delay position or the ON position will activate the wiper Rotating the center of the switch all the way up or down will turn on the wash function The wash pump wil
185. dicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x WARNING ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has 3 available operating modes in 2WD High Range 2 available operating modes on 2WD ve hicles and 1 operating mode in WD Low Range High Range AWD Models or 2WD Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD high range and in 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD low range or neutral back to 4WD high range the ESP system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off mode for
186. ds steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mo par cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Leather Seat Care amp Cleaning Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respi
187. e Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to s
188. e WARNING Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down Impact type tools may damage the winch mechanism 12 Reinstall the rubber plug into the floor of the cargo area JUMP STARTING If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 375 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with HENOG out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles place the transmission in P Park and turn Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow YE the ignition OFF battery fluid to contact eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or cal loads on skin flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from battery the vent holes 6 WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and persona
189. e able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 13 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range
190. e label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under inflated Ac cordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not b
191. e maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off road use only 4WD Low Range Full Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD low range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD low range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD high range or neutral to AWD low range the ESP system will be in this Full Off mode In 4WD low range ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the normal ESP stability function returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is deactivated at low vehicle speeds in 4WD low range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated in 4WD low range when ESP is off NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed into the P Park position from any other position and then moved out of the P Park position This will occur ev
192. e most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained NEE IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 449 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 450 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To
193. e number for the phone book entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature E Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phone book entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phone book entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phone book from which you choose To select one of the entries 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note
194. e that is within the sensors field of view The monitored area seems oval in shape The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 11 8 inches 30 cm up to 59 inches 150 cm from the rear fascia in the horizontal direction depending on the location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle Rear Park Assist Warning Display The Rear Park Assist Warning Display located in the headliner near the flipper glass provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle Rear Park Assist Display When the ignition is changed to the RUN ON position the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about 1 second Each side of the warning display has 6 yellow and 2 red LEDs The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red LED is ON ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LED s when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 1st LED 59 in 150 cm Yellow None 2nd LED 51 in 130 cm Yellow None 3rd LED 45 in 115 cm Yellow None 4th LED 31 5 in 80 cm 39 in 100 cm Yellow None 5th LED 25 5 in 65 cm 33 5 in 85 cm
195. e that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
196. e the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met Power Sunroof Switch 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any mov
197. e will sound when this light turns on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 11 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light This indicator light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash any time the ESP or TCS is active and helping to improve vehicle stability If the ESP TCS Indicator Light is on solid the ESP system has been turned off by the driver or a temporary condition exists that will not allow full ESP function 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se 12 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and d inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressur
198. e within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction A the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will be dis played in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or met
199. earch for the next channel pausing for 8 seconds before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional 3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius
200. econds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds when ignition is off Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE REN MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN multimedia system contains a radio CD DVD player USB port
201. ected while in the defrost or defrost floor modes Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to blink and then turn off es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 Rear Climate Control If Equipped The Manual Rear Climate Control system has one floor air outlet passenger side and two panel outlets in the rear quarter trim on each side The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and upper outlets If rear heating cooling is desired press the Rear On Off Switch located in the upper switch bank above the controls and select Floor Bi Level or Panel from the Rear Control Panel right knob located on the right rear quarter trim panel Rear On Off Switch 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The rear temperature blower speed and mode control can Rear Blower Control be adjusted as desired by the third row seat occupants The left knob on the Rear Control Panel has four posi tions Off and a range of three blower speeds This allows the third row seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle CAUTION Interior air enters the Manual Rear Zone Climate Control system through an intake grille located in the passenger side trim panel behind the third seat The heater outlets are located in the passenger side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in
202. ed Setting 138 To Accelerate For Passing 139 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M H Electronic Brake Control System 139 Rear Park Assist Sensors 154 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 139 Rear Park Assist Warning Display 154 TCS Traction Control System 140 Enable Disable The Rear Park Assist System 156 BAS Brake Assist System 141 Service The Rear Park Assist System 156 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 142 Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System 157 ESP Electronic Stability Program 143 W Rear Camera If Equipped 157 TSC Trailer Sway Control 147 Turning The Rear Camera On 157 HSA Hill Start Assist AWD Models With Turning The Rear Camera Off 158 MAR ie MK AER 1 ll Overhead Console If Equipped 158 v NN S CS IE 450 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 159 ESP BAS Warning Lamp And ESP TCS Programming HomeLink 160 Indicator Light oe EE EE EE EE EE ee ee 152 Gate Operator Canadian Programming 163 Wl Rear Park Assist System If Equipped 153 Using HomeLink 0000 163 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
203. eel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section for more information es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 BAS Brake Assist System The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns
204. el facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the rig
205. em will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example in USA 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid USA phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Call by Saying a Name Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call System will prompt you to say the name of the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phone book The UCo
206. ement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur r
207. en INDEX 463 Star oe ba a ae Ae OR AE RR ORG KC 277 Temperature Gauge x abuse e re EE 191 Engine Oil Viscosity EE EE ee EE Ee ee 390 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ees esse ee 390 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 56 Entry System Illuminated 21 Event Data Recorder 0000000 a ee 58 Exhaust Gas Caution 04 38 70 337 Exhaust System ud aud ea olka eo EE 401 Extender Seat Belt 2 0 0 00000 cee 48 Exterior Finish Care 0 0 0 0 cee eee nee 415 Filters Air Cleaner SS SS ES SE eee 393 Engine Oil en aw EER eiaa d BEDE anes 391 Engine Oil Disposal sesse tite mrene spies 391 Finish Care ertani era me Sea ek iE Pd 415 Flashers ccs tara eae OE dU eae qon diss 366 Hazard Warning es cioe ede ces 366 Tum Signal ias ecco DR RE 187 430 432 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range ck sigue RE ADR 340 Engine Oll see ks nosimi tia ki Etta 340 Fuel Requirements 337 339 Replacement Parts syani Taea EE Ee Ee ee 340 oe EE ER AE OE Roe 340 Flipper Glass Liftgate ee ee ee EE EE ee 35 Flooded Engine Starting sees ees se ee 279 Fluid Capacities EE EE EE ee ee ee 435 Fluid Eeaks i is X ae m3 72 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 411 412 Engine OW cse Mace Sa ae 389 Power Steering vs face aoe Y heretici dimas d 398 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 436 Fog Light Service oco rur ea 431
208. en if the message was previously cleared an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off mode is intended for off road use only TSC Trailer Sway Conirol TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Section 5 of this manual for more information on towing a trailer with your vehicle When TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway HSA Hill Start Assist 4WD Models with NV245 Two Speed Transfer Case On
209. en the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch Latch Plate Latch Plate To Buckle 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision WARNING A lap belt wor
210. ence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed COMMAND VIEW SKYLIGHTS IF EQUIPPED The two fixed skylights are above the second row seats The glass is tinted to shield the second row occupants from the sun and glare Each skylight includes a roller shade that is concealed in the assembly to block out more light when desired NOTE Hold onto shade handle until shade is com pletely open or closed Roller Shade es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 POWER OUTLET Front Power Outlet To the left and right of the convenience tray lower center of instrument panel is an outlet for electrically powered accessories Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to access the outlet Rear Power Outlet If Equipped The rear power outlet if equipped is located in the left
211. ended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 SEEK SCAN Mo C RND MP3 WMA PUSHON PUSH AUDIO SELECT VOLUME TUNE SCROLL 8189f8f5 RES Radio Non Satellite Model Shown With Satellite Similar Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switc
212. ensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound i The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will ed illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the es STARTING AND OPERATING 327 inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive
213. eplacement Parts 00000 I Addins RE EO eirati Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Ba Vehicle Loading eie EE Ma BR BR eara Certification Label sco ESE SS H Trailer Towing osse EE ee smn vh oe oes Common Towing Definitions Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings Trailer And Tongue Weight 352 Towing Requirements 04 353 Towing TIPS is dca dos DR ehe eda 357 lll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 359 Towing 2WD Models 359 Towing Quadra Trac I Single Speed Transfer Case 4WD Models 0 055 359 Towing Quadra Trac II Quadra Drive II 4WD Models N Snow Plow 0 eee eee eee 363 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the WARNING inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a belts number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot wea
214. er for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than 3 hours tire pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Telltale Light will Hm OFF only after the tires have been CAUTION inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent mois ture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have bee
215. ers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition En gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument FN cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS In
216. ers can be badly burned by hot antifreeze coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check antifreeze coolant protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If antifreeze coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh antifreeze coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the antifreeze coolant will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedule the system
217. es Integrated Power Module Cav Cartridge Mini Fuse Description ity Fuse 9 10 Amp Trailer Tow Park Red Lamps 10 10 Amp Rt Park Lamps Red 12 20 Amp Front Control Module Yellow FCM Batt 4 13 20 Amp Front Control Module Yellow FCM Batt 2 14 20 Amp Adjustable Pedal Yellow Integrated Power Module d SURE HERO Tamps Caw Cartridge Min Fuse Description 16 20 Amp Horn ity Fuse Yellow 8 10 Amp Lt Park Lamps 17 20 Amp Rear Wiper Red Yellow 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cav Cartridge Mini Fuse Description Cav Cartridge Min Fuse Description ity Fuse ity Fuse 18 20 Amp Front Control Module 29 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow FCM Batt 1 Red Controller ORC R S 19 20 Amp Lt Trailer Tow Stop 30 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow Turn Red Controller ORC R O 20 20 Amp Front Control Module Yellow FCM Batt 3 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 21 20 Amp Rt Trailer Tow Stop Yellow Turn days you may want to take steps to protect your battery 22 30 Amp Final Drive Control ee Pink Module FDCM e Remove fuse 27 in the Intelligent Power Module MOD labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD 1 m v E ode an e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery 27 15 Amp Ignition Off Draw Blue IOD 1 28 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Yellow IOD 2 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 e Anytime you st
218. essing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset push button CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case afte
219. etent above the dimmer range turns the interior lights on Rotating the control to the Off extreme bottom position disables all the interior lights even when the doors and liftgate are open While in the Off position the instrument panel lighting is at the lowest light level and may not be suitable for night driving Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity level whenever the engine is running and the transmis sion is not in the P Park position The lights remain on until the ignition switch is turned OFF or the parking brake is engaged The headlight switch must be used for normal night time driving Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped 0 The fog light switch is located in the multi function control lever To activate the fog lights turn on the park turn lights low beam headlights or Auto headlights and pull out the end of the multi function control lever A light in the instrument cluster shows when the fog lights are on NOTE Turning on the high beam headlights turns off the fog lights A front fog light is a lighting device providing illumina tion forward of the vehicle under conditions of fog rain snow or dust Principally the front fog light supplements the lower beam of a standard headlight system ee
220. extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode when driving with any windows open even if only slightly to help keep fresh air circulating inside ve hicle Otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into the vehicle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned on If the bulb is not lit during starting have it replaced If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defrosters Check operation by selectin
221. f four speeds and OFF The blower fan mo tor will remain on until the system is turned to the OFF position or the ignition is turned OFF Temperature Control 812d193c The temperature of air can be selected by rotating the center temperature control knob The coldest temperature setting is on the extreme left and the warmest setting on the extreme right of the rotation The knob can be posi tioned at any point on the dial The mode selector the right rotary knob can be placed in several posi tions Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the occupants to fine tune sizaig27 Airflow distribution Defrost Sv Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained Defrost Floor tipe Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets x and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Some airflow is de
222. forma tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a UConnect System Not Available message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO
223. from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg 314 STARTING AND OPERATING M Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occ
224. ftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power close However vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and right front passenger and window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also ca
225. g nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 130 N m 95 ft lbs If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to it s fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME NOTE Tire should be stowed with the beauty side up Storing the tire upside down may result in scratching or damage to the wheel face Continue winching up the tire until you hear the winch ratchet three times Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the underbody of the vehicle Damage to the winch cable may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loos
226. g procedures and follow them carefully 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Se After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the heater cord to a ground fault interrupter protected 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire exten sion cord Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the coolant The engine block heater cord is located e 3 7L 4 7L Engine coiled and strapped to the engine oil dipstick tube e 5 7L Engine bundled and fastened to the injector harness WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution E STARTING AND OPERATING 281 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear
227. g the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Mirrors AR Hels ive Ae SOR ees Inside Day Night Mirror Driver s And Front Passenger Outside Power Remote Control Outside Mirrors If Equipped ire BE Ri SERE gek Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Outside Mirrors 0 000000 Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped
228. g this button will tem porarily put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present This will cause the LED to illuminate NOTE The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the climate control sensor s location Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system To provide you with maximum comfort in the auto matic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain off until the engine warms up However the fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is selected or if you manually select a blower speed e Under certain conditions after the vehicle is turned off the climate control system may recalibrate and a noise may be heard for 20 seconds This is part of normal operation Most of the time when in Automatic operation you can temporarily put the system into recirculation mode by pressing the Recirc button However under certain conditions in automatic the system is blowing air out of the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirc button is pressed the indicator will flash and remain off This tells you that you are unable to go into recirculation mode at this time If you would like to go to Recirculation mode you must first move your mode knob to panel panel floor or floor then hit the Recirc button This feature
229. gh an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phone book UConnect phone book nametag recognition rate is optimized for the person who stored the name in the phone book 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows and dry weather condition operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConne
230. gs Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s side view mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 7 Press and release the SET S button located on the driver s door 8 Within 5 seconds press and release memory button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be per formed within 5 seconds if you desire to also use a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall memory po sitions 9 Press and release the Lock button on one of the transmitters 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes or select Use Factory Settings from the EVIC and enter Yes Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 for more information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in Park to recall memory posit
231. h extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle Information Provided by DEALER UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel And Controls 185 Wi Instrument Cluster 0000 186 B Instrument Cluster Description 187 lll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 195 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays ss se SR ensi e e e e 197 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 200 Trip Functions Compass Display Ee ee ee 203 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fe t res oessa aest hee eee pend eka System Status siis RE DAE RR ee Paes 209 ll Radio General Information 210 Radio Broadcast Signals 210 Two Types Of Signals 211 Electrical Disturbances 211 AM Reception sis sia aaa a See dra e d toe 211 EM R ception uu ded dace e wb rre ta es 211 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se lll Sales
232. h the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light stays illuminated have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 17 4WD LOW Mode Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the 4WD LOW mode The front and rear drive shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed ESP BAS 4 WD LOW 18 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert in the Occupant Restraints section for more information 19 Cruise Indicator Light cruise Tris indicator lights when the speed control system is turned ON 20 Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to
233. h to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UCon nect message will display on the radio screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Phone Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more informa tion If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UCon nect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and freque
234. he left or right to go to the previous or next tracks RND Random Button RES Radios Only Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle on and shuffle off modes of the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is on List or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the following buttons will take you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod TUNE SCROLL Knob In the List mode the TUNE SCROLL knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning the TUNE SCROLL knob clockwise forward and counter clockwise backward scrolls through lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE SCROLL knob to select and start playing the track By turning the TUNE SCROLL knob fast you can jump through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME During all List modes the iPod will display all lists in wrap around mode So if the track you wish to select is at the bottom of the list you just turn the TUNE SCROLL knob backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster Radio Preset Buttons In the List mode the radio preset buttons are used as shortc
235. he locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable brake and accelerator pedals and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the Unlock button is pressed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Driver Memory Switches Your vehicle may have been delivered with two Remote Keyless Entry transmitters One or both transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to four transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the SET S button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Press the driver door memory button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settin
236. he system is hot or under pressure Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of antifreeze coolant and to insure that antifreeze coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant is a regu lated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals and children do not store ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills im mediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the antifreeze coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the antifreeze coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is not need to remove the r
237. her items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE level range Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for recommended engine oil change intervals Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395
238. ht SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 modes SCAN Button Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When mm writing MP3 files pay attention
239. ic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers
240. ice including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica against you tions should be obtained immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Crankcase Emission Control System Proper operation of this system depends on freedom from sticking or plugging due to deposits As vehicle mileage builds up the PCV valve and passages may accumulate deposits If a valve is not working properly replace it with a new valve DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or plugging deposits Replace if necessary Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Don t allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Don t lean over a battery when attaching cla
241. icle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can be caused to go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may rollover when some other vehicles may not INTRODUCTION 5 Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed Always Buckle Up BObfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label 6 INTRODUCTION M Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by
242. icle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed HDC is intended for low speed off road driving only At vehicle speeds above 30 mph 48 km h HDC will no longer function When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h HDC function will automatically resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set speed WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed ESP BAS Warning Lamp and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running ESP BAS If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a mal function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light
243. ight Promptly side of the instrument panel Do not modify the Does not come on during the 2 5 to 8 seconds after the front bumper or vehicle body structure ignition switch is first turned on You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters e Flickers or comes on and remains on for any period of time while driving e Remains on after the 2 5 to 8 second interval It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after air bag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavail able NOTE e A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually in dicative of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment e Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered
244. indicating the change Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 40 20 40 Second Row Folding Seat Fold and Tumble Second Row Seat The left center or right side of the second row seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room 1 Pull up on the seatback lever located on the outboard side of the seat NOTE Also pulling upward on this handle allows the outboard seating positions to be reclined Seatback Release Lever 2 Fold the seatback down and tumble the seat forward 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the outer second row seats in the tumbled position The outer second row seats are only intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third row seat Failure to follow these
245. ing problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 453 e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Call Toll Free at Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations e 1 800 890 4038 U S these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer acc AE controlled vehicle systems and features They show Or exactly how to find and correct problems the first time i using step by step troubleshooting and driveability VER wende Wort Wile heb ae procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com a a e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals e Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips 454 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each
246. ing A Flat Tire 368 Chart Tire Sizing c i oa n 308 Checks Safety ce Reb as 71 72 Child Restraint sag lee 9 bx 60 61 65 67 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 64 65 Child Safety Locks ires 30 Climate Control llle 257 CIOE s eia MAER ue hi IUE d 213 229 240 243 Cold Weather Operation 0 278 Command View Skylights 0 168 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 256 COMPASS ics du each a e a eae d aOR ed 203 Compass Calibration llle 204 Compass Variance EE EE ee EE EE ee 204 Computer Trip Travel esse ee Ee se ee 200 Connector UCI us EE ER EO a eS 244 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 244 Console Overhead 00 0000 cee eee 158 Contract Service cius P eine ed ae Seo Y 450 Converter Catalytic 1 6 0 0 0 0 eia ms 393 Cooling System 6 2 eee 401 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 403 Coolant Capacity 0 0 0 0 EE eee 435 Coolant Level 554 26e peer ue dreni 405 Disposal of Used Coolant 405 Drain Flush and Refill 402 Inspeeti n Saude debe eae Ke aaa SOR RS a 401 405 Points to Remember 00005 405 en INDEX 461 Pressure Cap iac dune ae EE AR eae OR RR 404 Radiator Cap esses eher eb ey 404 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 402 435 Courtesy Lights 0 0 2 EE EE ee EE Ee ee 130 Crankcase Emission Control System 395 C
247. ing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat adjust the seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 3 Wh
248. initions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR en STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward f
249. ion To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illu
250. ion to increase coolant flow and fan speed Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS and turn on AVC Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle a set the Mode control to Recirculate lt with A C on and roll up the windows MS Once y
251. ions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in Park a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 To recall the memory settings for driver one press memory button number 1 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmit ter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press memory button number 2 on the driver s door or the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmit ter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected To Disable A Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 2 Press and release memory button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to step 3 3 Press and release the memory SET S button located on the driver s door 4 Within 5 seconds press and release memory button 1 on the driver s door 5 Within 5 seconds press and release the Unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter To disable another
252. ish Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit pin code Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System Lists override ier alee phone List Ph es to be deleted Is ongs P i System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 819402e4 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book Lyes previous record again redial 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information This device complies with part
253. ission temperature This feature improves the warm up time of the engine and transmission If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANSMISSION ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 OVER TEMP message may display and the transmis sion may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmis sion cools down After cool down the transmission will resume normal operation In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine speed and load an upshift followed shortly thereafter by a downshift may occur This is a normal part of the overheat protection strategy when operating in the Tow Haul mode The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to the most desirable gear if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode If Equipped When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift to direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled under steady cruise conditions TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL
254. it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of 5 times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the eject button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the eject
255. itting cap could let impurities into the fuel system 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING e Never add fuel when the engine is running e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the tank filled VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear a
256. ity Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 3 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro cedure Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors liftgate liftgate flipper glass and ignition for unauthorized operation
257. ius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information including the set up of your on line listening account at no additional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACCESSORY position and the radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME selected Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in 2 minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mod
258. ive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar x 811adOdO Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to en STARTING AND OPERATING 317 check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under infl
259. jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks there will be one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle The rear hook will be located on the driver s side of the vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle 378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 2WD Models Only Provided the transmission is operable tow only in N Neutral at speeds not exceeding 30 mph 48 km h for distances of not more than 15 miles 24 km Towing at more than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 15 miles 24 km can cause severe transmission damage If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km remove the driveshaft or tow with all four wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and
260. keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined 21 Transmission Range Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission gear selection 22 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 23 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light If Equipped This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in the P Park position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is re quired and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 24 Front Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped 40 This light shows the front fog lights are ON 25 Voltage Warning Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage The light should turn on
261. killed only when the vehicle is parked Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located on the right side of the driver s seat and on the left side of the passenger s seat if equipped Moving the lumbar control lever fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 8 Way Driver s Power Seat The driver s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver s seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment Power Seat Switches 4 Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped The front passenger s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the passenger seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls forward rearward adjust ment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjust ment NOTE The 4 way seat does not have an up down adjustment Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjustable head restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The head restraints have a locking button which must
262. l injury could result Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 volt system i e Do not use a 24 volt power source 1 Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 376 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte sguirting out the battery vent 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle NEE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377 WARNING e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt
263. l continue to operate as long as the button is pressed Upon release the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position Rear Wiper Washer Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position If the liftgate flipper glass is open connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade When the liftgate flipper glass is closed es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs to be turned OFF and ON to restart the rear wiper Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radia tor antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Rear Window Defroster If Equipped Press this button located on the Climate Control panel to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illuminate to indicate the rear window de froster is ON The defroster automatically turns off after about 10 minutes of o
264. l position Drain First remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft Ibs 20 34 N m es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 CAUTION When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check 3 7L Engine Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction
265. lease When the panic alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the panic alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 23 feet 7 meters from the vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the panic alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY Customer Key Fob Program ming If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate NOTE Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the FOBIK Insert a small flat bladed screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door BATTERY ACCESS DOOR 81bb1827 FOBIK Battery Replacement
266. lemental Restraint Systems SRS ee ee ee ee 48 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Child Restraint sess eee ce RE RR AE ed 60 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The ll Engine Break In Recommendations 69 ee n la Safety Tips nep RR ERR esc 70 Safety Checka oir ORDIN Ke Cuide The Vehicle OAR See a a e eeu Exhaust GaS EERS BEE REED EE SO EE 70 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the double sided integrated key into the igni tion switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the detented ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Fob with Integrated Key FOBIK The Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter and a valet key which stores in the rear of the Fob The
267. light will illuminate in the instru ment cluster to indicate when the switch has been 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission limp home mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear 3 7L engine or in direct gear 4 7L and 5 7L engines until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the P Park position 3 Turn off the engine be sure to turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will continue to operate Only 2nd gear 3 7L engine or 3rd gear 4 7L and 5 7L engines will be available in the D Drive position Have the transmission checked at your autho rized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission o
268. livered to defrost while in the floor mode so that comfort can be maintained Bi Level v Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console and under the front seats to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to partially block airflow The center console outlets deliver condi tioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air Panel Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Recirculation The recirculation feature can be selected with c the mode control knob You may choose be tween Bi Level Recirculation and Panel Recir culation air outlets while in this mode Nor mally air enters from outside the vehicle However when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is re used Use this mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle The Recirculation mode can also be used to temporarily block out outside odors smoke and dust Air Conditioning Operation To turn on the Air Conditioning set the fan control at any speed and press the snowflake button 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M located on the control panel Conditioned air will be directed through the outlets selected by the mode control A light in the sn
269. lly disabled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0 9 inches 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Pro grammable Features in Section 4 for more information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood pull the release lever inside your vehicle located below the instrument panel and in front of the driver s door Hood Release Handle 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Then reach under the hood move safety latch to the left and lift the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage 816024a0 Underhood Safety Latch WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Multi Function Control Lever The multi
270. lock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the transmitter To change the cur rent setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Tu
271. lways remove any build up of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the OFF position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the OFF position damage to the wiper motor may occur 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the lever is released and then resume the intermit tent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Use this feature when weather conditions make occa sional usage of the wipers necessary Pull down and release the control lever for a single wiping cycle Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Turn the end of the lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired delay interval The delay can be regulated from a maxi mum of appr
272. ly The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop ona hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 8 grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in R Reverse gear HSA will work in R Reverse and all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in N Neutral or P Park WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Towing with HSA HSA will provide assista
273. minated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are ot
274. mode setting and select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode knob to one of the following positions When the Mode is set to any position other than AUTO The automatic control of air temperature is disabled The user must adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired tem perature e Defrost Gy Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained NOTE The defrost mode is not automatically selected It must be manually selected when desired e Defrost Floor Qe Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets ef and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some air flow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained e Floor uf Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Some airflow is delivered to defrost while in floor mode so that comfort can be maintained e Bi Level v Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Air flows through the registers in the back of the center
275. mps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Don t use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Don t allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Always wash hands after handling the battery battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case If a fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Air Conditioner Maintenance N WARNING For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt condition should also be checked at this time e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants
276. n 315 Tire Inflation Pressures 316 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 318 Radial Ply Tires serere 04480046 sikit 318 Tire Spinning ene vee ieee e ee 318 NEE STARTING AND OPERATING 275 Tread Wear Indicators 319 Reformulated Gasoline 334 Lite O Teer i sn cote visco ridus s eg d 320 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 335 Replacement Tires aos iinit d a paoia in i 320 MMT In Gasoline u sgeu niaaa i EE ee 335 Alignment And Balance 321 Materials Added To Fuel 336 B Tire Chains ss ek eee Ea REESE aa 322 Fuel System Cautions i i ec s 336 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 322 Carbon Monoxide Warnings li Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 323 W Flexible Fuel 4 7L Engine Only Base System If Equipped ssssse 326 It Equipped iua vus sae e dx ed se Premium System If Equipped 328 E 85 General Information General Information lille 333 Ean EMRE MEDD Sidera paasa Aes ae H Fuel Requirements s occ rd er trn 333 as Sessa Gana aap eae de e SL Ege nappe os o edema ol Eng ee Bee de eai qiia donee oe Starting corn pede T 340 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Cruising Range ic as can EE RR as Fond R
277. n Wath ear T 239 Power Distribution Center Fuses 422 Door LOCKS 24 4 4 EER 4444 n RR SEER 29 Inverter se 256 0 pad Rex N aed haces ae ee 170 Lift Gate iusto oa cite e ae ee ciate 36 MiFrrOIS iu eR OSEE EE ARR Pa Ed 80 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 169 SEAIS serei pee een rand PS rd eX REPE s 110 Steering cae ae Wid XC S Ae UR CARA goa 305 398 DUDFOOE oeer EG E DEAR Re IE BEE ee Re EE 165 Windows x 3 d OER OE EE EE 31 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 47 Preparation for Jacking 06 370 Pretensioners Seat Belts ci esae eS a Gr Va eos E 46 Programmable Electronic Features 205 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry a sed space Pgh EE UR ad aes 21 en INDEX 471 Quadra Trae s assess ach dom cR RO 290 291 Radial Ply res esu RR pe RR RR e 318 Radio Broadcast Signals 04 210 Radio Navigation iese EE EE ee Ee se sis 242 Radio Operation 000000005 240 256 Radio Satellite 239 240 243 249 Radio Sound Systems 0 000 239 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 133 Rear Air Conditioning cs ee eesis terekre 267 Rear Axle Differential 0 410 Rear Camera 0 0 0 eee ees 157 Rear Cup Holder ecese ss ee i rb Res 172 Rear Heater sis seed aeg e oe ER ae wowed 267 Rear Park Sense System isses cbe daw SE 153 Rear Seat Fold and Tumble 113 Rear Seat F
278. n be used to hold infant and child restraint systems NOTE The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including fatalities if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision which includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webb
279. n established for the tire size equipped on your NOTE vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care mm damage may result when using replacement equip and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire ment that is not of the same size type and or style failure or condition Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels S
280. n fluids such as oil power steering fluid and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings There fore oil wetness at the hose coupling area is not neces sarily an indication of leakage Actual dripping of hot fluid when systems are under pressure during vehicle operation should be noted before hose is replaced based on leakage NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be done when ever the brake system is serviced and every engine oil change WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the brake system warning lamp shows system failure Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Par
281. n leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in P Park Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan gerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the gear selector Parking Brake lever Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and could operate power windows other controls or the gear shift lever is in the P Park position When move the vehicle parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before placing the gear shift lever in P Park otherwise before driving failure to do so can lead to brake the load on the transmission locking mechanism may problems due to excessive heating of the rear make it difficult to move the selector out of P Park brakes 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
282. n to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode 5 7L Engine Only Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Vehicles with the 5 7L Multi Displacement System MDS are equipped with the FUEL SAVER MODE in the Trip Functions of the EVIC The FUEL SAVER message will display above the average fuel economy in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever MDS allows the engine to operate on four cylinders which will vary depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Hueraaes HP 81979318 4 Cylinder Operation MDS On FUEL SHUER MODE nes 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME This feature allows you to monitor when the MDS switches off the fuel on four of the eight cylinders and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase the time in which the fuel saver mode is active x MESA ios sn Senes i 1142 mi 8 Cylinder Operation MDS Off 819793f4 e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantane
283. n too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdo men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6 To release the belt push the red button marked PRESS comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its will withdraw any slack in the belt stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down y ae the webbing to allow it to retract fully DE WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Removing Slack From Belt 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or dow
284. n your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may re sult in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in Overdrive and in Drive NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Manually shifting using the ERS shift control between 4 direct gear and 5 D Overdrive gear positions will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive NOTE If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into any other gear position Rocking the Vehicle
285. nce when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in P Park and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual HDC Hill Descent Control AWD Models with NV245 Two Speed Transfer Case Only HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations and is available in 4 LOW range o
286. ncy displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE con
287. nd injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced WORN TIRE These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the indicators appear in 2 or more adjacent grooves the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that yo
288. nd place the gear selector in P Park Turn OFF the ignition N BLOCKA e Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 371 Jacking Instructions 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from storage 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools as shown Connect jack handle driver A to two extensions B then to the lug wrench C 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front axle place it under the front lower control arm as shown For the rear axle place it under the axle near the wheel to be changed Ensure the jack is closest to the inside of the wheel when jacking on the rear axle Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 8147326d Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 8141842b Front Jacking Location NEE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 373 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lu
289. nd possible Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation personal injury fore trail f Pe bee maler Wee An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically 356 STARTING AND OPERATING Se actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with WARNING a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys lbs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes lbs 907 kg when you need them and could have an accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety STARTING AND OPERATING 357
290. nd the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the Phone button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UCon nect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for 5 seconds until the session begin
291. ng at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your dealer for radial tire repairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h es STARTING AND OPERATING 319 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode a
292. ng the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Information Provided by DEALER INDEX 458 INDEX ae ABS Anti Lock Brake System 188 302 Adding Fuel iis Rey ME ee esee 341 Adding Washer Fluid sessi EE EE EE ee 177 Adjustable Pedals 2 EE EE EE EE EE ee 135 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 393 Air Conditioner Maintenance 397 Air Conditioning Sias bs Soon ey dee peg aet 259 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 269 Air Conditioning Rear Zone 267 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 398 Air Conditioning System llus 259 Air Piltef cosut OE OE EG 393 Air Pressure Tires llle 316 up M CT 48 Airbag Deployment 5 452 yr e EEG RE 55 Airbag Light
293. nic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be ad justed when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Ad justable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse Refer ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED to Pe beue Information Center EVIC in When engaged this device takes over accelerator opera Section 4 for more information tions at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h for 3 7L 4 7L engines and 25 mph 40 km h for 5 7L engines to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path Electronic Speed Control Operation The speed control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Electronic Speed Control Switch To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use WARNING Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the le
294. ning After 5 seconds the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for more information 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M In this mode ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is deacti vated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illumi nated when ESP is off To turn ESP on again momen tarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed into the P Park position from any other position and then moved out of the P Park position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasiv
295. nit to the side of the liftgate opening 81bd6519 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 3 Pull the outboard side of the rear lamp unit rearward far enough to unsnap the two ball studs on the outboard side of the lamp housing from the two plastic grommets in the quarter outer panel Pull the lamp unit rearward far enough away to access the bulbs 4 Firmly grasp the appropriate bulb socket on the back of the rear lamp unit housing and turn 1 4 turn counter clockwise to unlock it 81bd6521 1 Rear Backup Lamp Bulb 2 Rear Park Stop Lamp Bulb 7 3 Rear Park Turn Signal Bulb 4 Rear Side Marker Lamp Bulb 5 Disconnect the electrical connector 6 Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the opening in the housing 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se 7 Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 815727fa 2 Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL housing 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket 4 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the CHMSL 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 21 Gallons 79 Liter
296. nly To enable HDC transfer case must be in 4 LOW range press the HDC switch If the HDC switch is pressed when the vehicle is not in 4 LOW range the light in the switch will flash for 5 seconds and HDC will not be enabled ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Hill Descent Switch When HDC is enabled properly the message HILL DESCENT CONTROL will appear in the EVIC and the light in the switch will be illuminated HDC will auto matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed when necessary HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a hill It will usually not activate on level ground The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the trans mission gear selected e 1st 1 mph 1 6 km h e 2nd 2 5 mph 4 km h e 3rd 4 mph 6 km h e 4th 5 5 mph 9 km h e 5th 7 5 mph 12 km h e Reverse R 1 mph 1 6 km h e Neutral N 2 5 mph 4 km h e Park P HDC will not function 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M HDC also has the capability to sense rough terrain and will automatically adjust to a slightly slower set speed about 3 mph 5 km h than normal HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase veh
297. nnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phone book entry that you are adding 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phone book with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language Phonebook Download UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the Phone button and say Phonebook Download
298. nts WARNING An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information STARTING AND OPERATING 349 EXAMPLE ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT m FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION Siaa 81811968 Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV E
299. nverter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the converter as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool systems can result in civil penalties being assessed Serv
300. nward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a second or third row seating position Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seat when ever possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Energ
301. oblems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME bisection pase Go ra Bit rate kbps mer dio 48 44 1 32 160 128 113 96 80 64 56 48 ec ul 24 22 05 16 e RF To e EN Bit Rate kbps WMA sandas To 192 VER ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of
302. oceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the system 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed SALES CODE RER AM FM CD DVD RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE Theradio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability RER combines a Global Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of desti nations and routes This
303. ock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of P Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of P Park 5 Speed Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first P Park This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first then place the selector in P Park position 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Never use P Park position as a substitute for the parking
304. olding 000 113 117 Rear Window Defroster SS 177 Rear Window Features 0 000005 176 Rear Wiper Washer 0 000000 sues 176 Rearview Mirrors ew senda dt eoe mde es 78 Reclining Front Seats 0000000 108 Recorder Event Data 0 0000 eee 58 Recreational Towing 0000005 359 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 360 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 361 Reformulated Gasoline 000 334 Retrigerant ss ogc cis gnu DA Sd oae ges 398 Reminder Lights On 0 000005 128 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 00 0c eens 46 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 254 Remote Starting System 000 26 Replacement Bulbs sses ia AR EER RR ek EE RR ER 427 Replacement Keys deseo e eae es 18 Replacement Tires 2 24 4 244 4r RS 320 Reporting Safety Defects 04 451 Restraints Child 472 INDEX aa Restraints Occupant vss eR RR Re 38 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 289 Roll Over Watning 4s sees ene Moiese ae 5 Roof Type Carrier esee 177 Rotation Tires SS SS eee 322 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 71 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 72 Safety Defects Reporting 451 Safety Exhaust Gas lille 38 Safety Information Tire 004 306 Safety TIP
305. on E E ER ayn M ees 71 Anti Lock 4064359042 HERE bead ob Labs 188 Automatic Headlights llus 126 Back Up serre base eei CS Obagi ER Geb 432 Battery Savel a acne ee a ox Ke ack Sa 125 Brake Assist Warning 152 193 Brake Warning sd ke ead aa de ees 187 Bulb Replacement 00 2000 428 Center Mounted Stop 2050 434 Courtesy Reading lille 130 Cruise ses aa cus bx EE DE EE RR e RR EE 193 Daytime Running ees a patineta iiia 128 Dimmer Switch Headlight 124 129 Electronic Stability Program ESP dicato oues RERO ERE has 152 189 193 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 194 FOR duse EE Peeters 128 194 431 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 193 ai EE eiid e pea eS 419 Hazard Warning Flasher 366 Headlight Switch 1 9 sere ass 125 Headlights 2e ice onto Sho ep qase eC 428 Headlights On With Wipers 126 en INDEX 467 High Beam Indicator lille 187 Illuminated Entry 5 cw cree Res 21 Instrument Cluster ssn 125 127 Interlof 2 222 4deso dox N SEE Ge 127 130 Lights On Reminder 000 128 Eow Fuel 22223222 Eabb Re Y EE ed Res 195 Low Dre 2c2eidce kc RR RE RR 004 190 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 187 Oil Pressure sees 189 PASSING pA sie Cite oh BAR een eR eek 129 Reading ss RE GER ESE ID ER ee 130 Rear Servicing se soe cede e et e Rey
306. on switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button UConnect Hands Free Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone UCon nect feature if equipped Refer to Hands Free Com munication UConnect in Section 3 for more in
307. onnected and synchronized to the vehicle system this may take a few seconds to connect the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod display and it starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below Controlling the iPod using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode the iPod audio track if available from iPod will start playing over the vehicle audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod will be in Play mode In this Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data TUNE SCROLL Knob Use the TUNE SCROLL knob to go to the next or previous track The TUNE SCROLL knob functions similar to the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first 2 seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list and turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RW Rewind Button Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the current track Holding the RW button long enough will take you back to the beginning of the current track Pressing and
308. ontrol at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift to R Reverse Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls you lose forward motion or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a hill in R Reverse gear Never back down a hill in N Neutral using only the brake ee STARTING
309. or antirust products as they may not e The manufacturer recommends using Mopar be compatible with the antifreeze coolant and may Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula plug the radiator HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based antifreeze coolant Use of Propylene Glycol base antifreeze coolant is not recommended e e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any ized water when mixing the water antifreeze cool accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces ant solution The use of lower quality water will WARNING reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precau tion Never add antifreeze coolant when the en gine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes NOTE Mixing antifreeze coolant types will decrease pressure to build up in the cooling system To the life of the antifreeze coolant and will require more prevent scalding or injury do not remove the frequent antifreeze coolant changes pressure cap while t
310. or lubricants can cause the system to fail reguiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for additional warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair reguiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Power Steering Fluid Check The power steering system requires the use of Mopar Hydraulic System Power Steering Fluid P N 05142893AA or equivalent which meets DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 10838 CAUTION Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF or other types of power steering fluids when servicing the power steering system of this vehicle Damage to the power steering system can result from the use of the wrong power steering fluid Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval
311. orce exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 1096 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle 348 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requireme
312. ore your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Glove Box Light a eses ean ER EER ER N ER RE 194 Grab Handle Light L002825W5W Overhead Console Reading Lights VT4976 Rear Cargo Light llle 214 2 Visor Vanity Light ee ee ee ee ee ee ee V26377 Underpanel Courtesy Lights 906 Instrument Cluster General Illumination 103 Telltale Hazard Light 00 74 Available only from authorized dealers Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lights sere bk nde Ren 3057K Front Fog Lights css dore 000 ERREUR RS 9145 Front Park Tum Light 3157A Front Side Marker lille W5W Headlights Low Beam 000 9006 Headlights High Beam lesus 9005 Rear Turn Stop Tail Lights 3057K NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M BULB REPLACEMENT Head Light 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the headlamp cover Insert
313. ot provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circum stances may result in poorer performance REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 5 7L Engines If Equipped The 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when REGOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ME using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular and mid grade gaso lines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolin
314. ou are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel 7 or Bi Level s p with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel __ and tum on A C If it s cloudy or vat dark set the Mode control to Bi Level lt 4 with A C on Adjust Temperature Q iln control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost S e CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and bg Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 6 K 490 ae doa COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor J If its sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 74 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode Control to Defrost Floor LS Jor cae Defrost Sg as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 51352266 Information Provided by DEALER STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures ese see see see 277 Normal Starting rus waa ale RR EA 278 Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or Ee ET ee he VH pde ee 278 If Engine Fails To Start 0 279 After Starting sis ccs ER ee nasa e nn 280 H Engine Block Heater If Equipped 280 Bl Automatic Transmission llus 281 Shift Lock Manual Override If Equipped 281 B
315. ous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second tim
316. owflake button shows that the air conditioning is on Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the air conditioning compressor is on This is a normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy Automatic Temperature Control If Equipped The Infrared Dual Zone Climate Control System auto matically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger This is accomplished by a dual sun sensor in the top of the instrument panel and an infrared sensor located in the face of the control unit There are also various sensors monitored by this system which take account for vehicle speed A C pressure outside temperature and engine cooling temperature The infrared sensor independently measures the surface temperature of the driver and passenger Based on the sensor input the system automatically adjusts the air flow temperature the air flow volume and amount of outside air recirculation This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing conditions 8135020a Automatic Temperature Controls ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 NOTE The numbers on the temperature dial represent a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to Auto and not the actual air temperature Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the right mode knob to AUTO and place the blower control left knob to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO
317. owing another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the CAUTION pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis tances or brake damage The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed after market radios or e When descending mountains or hills repeated brak telephones ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sibl sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm up System is functioning which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while WARNING driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuver ing parking or stopping To use your brakes and accelerator more safely follow these tips e Do not drive too fast for road conditions es
318. oximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 1 2 second NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Rain Sensing Wipers lf Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multi function lever to one of five settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multi function lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The rain sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the LOW or HIGH speed position e The rain sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance e A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC allows the Rain
319. pad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect s
320. par Parts cessere exter dea 451 Temperature Grades 448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and ar
321. pecially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control e After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yo
322. peration instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity This vehicle is not equipped with roof rack cross rails as built unless ordered as optional equipment Cross rails must be installed prior to carrying loads on the roof rack 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If not equipped your authorized dealer can order and install Mopar cross rails built specifically for this roof rack system or a number of after market rails that are tailored to your life style or activities The optional cross rails have five specific locations iden tified by a feature on both the side rail and the cross rail Cross rails must be secured in one of the five detent locations on the side rail to prevent movement with a sudden stop The cross rails must also be installed using the correct orientation the longer rail toward the front with the wind trip toward the front of the vehicle as shown below For improved windnoise performance when cross rails are not in use place them in detent positions 1 first detent from the front of the vehicle and 4 second detent from the rear of the vehicle
323. ported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and mp3 wma tracks the radio will only play the mp3 wma tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back pr
324. r playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being On in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System If Equipped The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 81350206 Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls The instrument panel features four dual vane airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be closed to partially block airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Blower Control NE 812d1942 The rotary knob on the left controls the blower and can be set in one o
325. r will flash and go out when the shift is complete Release the T handle NOTE If shift conditions interlocks are not met or a transfer case motor temperature protection condition exists a CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURES message will flash from the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual NOTE Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph 0 to 5 km h If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph 5 km h the transfer case will not allow the shift Neutral N Shift Procedure 1 Key ON engine off 2 Vehicle stopped with foot on brake 3 Place transmission in N Neutral 4 Hold down N Neutral pin switch with a pen etc for 4 seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress Lamp will stop blinking stay on solid when Neutral shift is complete A 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will display on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 Neutral Switch 5 Repeat Steps 1 4 to shift out
326. ra screen Highlight DONE and press ENTER The rear camera is now enabled 3 When the vehicle is shifted into R Reverse the CAUTION screen will appear followed by an image of the rear of the vehicle 4 When the vehicle is shifted out of R Reverse the rear camera mode is exited and the Navigation or Audio screen appears again Turning the Rear Camera Off 1 To turn the rear camera off select Rear Camera at the Systems Settings screen and press ENTER Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions 2 Select OFF at the Rear Camera screen Highlight DONE and press ENTER The rear camera is now disabled Overhead Console es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 ieee eee HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand d held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off of your vehi cle s battery Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu with a garage door opener that has a stop and rity Alarm is active reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener models manufa
327. rake Transmission Interlock System 283 5 Speed Automatic Transmission Gear Ranges 6 508 de asco s e aUe de Rocking The Vehicle 289 ll Four Wheel Drive Operation 290 Quadra Trac I Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped 290 Quadra Trac II Operating Instructions Precautions If Equipped 291 Shift POSIGIOnS eiim REPE E ae 292 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME shifting Procedures ss Ren 293 Quadra Drive II System If Equipped 295 H On Road Driving Tips 0 0 296 B Off Road Driving Tips sss E RENEE N 296 When To Use 4WD Low Range ltEquipped see in ge b RR RED gs 296 Driving Through Water 296 Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 298 Hill Climbing ie Ik Ds RR BEE RE DE ds 298 Traction Downhill 2205 299 After Driving Off Road 0 299 N Parking Brake 152r 046 300 Bl Anti Lock Brake System 00 0 302 N Power Steering ll Multi Displacement System MDS 5 7L Engine OY sig p TTE 306 N Tire Safety Information 0 306 Tire Markings 2 cm Fe Res 306 Tire Identification Number TIN 310 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 311 Bl Tires General Information 315 lue Pressure 22oslsbes eleme RR R
328. ransfer the N Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment Neutral position without first fully engag ng the should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The mm prune Hu case ua position airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect edly or could fail to deploy during a collision WARNING Do not add a snow plow winches or any other Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system and you could be injured 364 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flashers 366 Jacking Instructions 0004 371 H if Your Engine Overheats 367 WiJump Starting 0 0 0 0 ee H Jacking And Tire Changing 368 MH Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped Jack Location Ras 5 s e24e EE ER eer 368 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle Spare Tire Stowage 0000000 369 2WD Models Only 000
329. ratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 FU
330. rd as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle upward until fully engaged es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjustable pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in actuating the pedals Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedals rearward toward the driver Press the top of the switch to move the pedals forward away from the driver 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF CAUTION e The pedals can be adjusted while driving Do not place any article under the adjustable pedal s e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in R or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage Reverse or when the Speed Control is ON A message will be displayed in the Electro
331. rear cargo area Rear Power Outlet All accessories connected to this outlet should be re moved or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED 1 CAUTION There is a 110 volt 150 watt inverter outlet located on Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off the back of the center console to convert DC current to AC current This outlet can be used to power small e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw appliances and electronics power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the Power Inverter generator to recharge the vehicle s battery es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Press the power inverter switch located on the upper inverter status indicator turns ON The status indicator of switch bank to turn the power on to the outlet Pre
332. rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front 346 STARTING AND OPERATING ME or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related def
333. releasing the RW button will go back 5 seconds of the current track FF Fast Forward Button Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the current track Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward 5 seconds of the current track SEEK Buttons Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next track If the left down button is pressed during the first 2 seconds of the current track it will go back to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the current track it will go back to the beginning of the track If the right up button is pressed during Play mode it will go to the next track in the list INFO Button Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the information Track Title Artist Album etc for that track Each press the INFO button will take you to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all of the screens the last press of the INFO button will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio REPEAT Button Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing track ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button will play the first 5 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the desired track press the SCAN button again During the SCAN mode you can also press the SEEK button to t
334. ress the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player
335. rm the first inspection at M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months ae TUO 24 Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months ails ae 24 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot 24 000 40 000 24 seals replace if necessary 44 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Perform Maintenance Every Where time and mileage are listed follow the interval that occurs first M A N T E N Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months Replace the engine air cleaner filter 30 000 50 000 30 E Check the PCV valve replace if necessary Perform zE the first inspection at 60 000 miles 100 000 km or 60 30 000 50 000 30 S months di Inspect the transfer case fluid 30 000 50 000 30 Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Only 30 000 50 000 30 DE Replace the spark plugs 3 7L 5 7L Engines 30 000 50 000 30 7 Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter if N using your vehicle for any of the following police 60 000 100 000 60 EE taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing hg Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or fre 60 000 100 000 60 quent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant 102 000 170 000 60 Replace the ignition cables 4 7L Only 102 000 170 00
336. rn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for details 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass Press the Flipper Glass Trunk Release button on the transmitter two times to release the flipper glass WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle Using The Panic Alarm To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one second and re
337. ror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Driver s and Front Passenger Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with outside automatic dim ming mirrors they will operate when the inside auto matic dimming mirror is on The outside mirrors operate off the inside mirror switch and will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare when the inside mirror does Power Remote Control Outside Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Power Mirror Switches Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for details Heated Remote Control Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defrost Lighted
338. rt is above 40 F 4 C outside temperature It may be possible to have a message that will not clear due to the test being disabled due to low outside temperatures If the test is performed and the problem is gone the message will disappear If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off See your authorized dealer for service EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verifies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test stat
339. ruise Light is see ie vos base mace ne ee es 193 Cup Holder 22 50 s cube Ee RR see eee Eg t 172 Customer Assistance elles 448 Data Recorder Event 0 0 00 00 eee 58 Daytime Running Lights 128 Dealer Service 246i Rete RR 388 Defroster Rear Window 177 Defroster Windshield 71 258 265 Diagnostic System Onboard 385 Digital Video Disc DVD Player 239 Dimmer Switch Headlight 129 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 412 OU Engine uuu aco Mace eee ER EE 389 Power Steering cendo sy Ba RR sawed Barend 398 Disabled Vehicle Towing llle 378 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 405 Engine Oll iiem eme RR ER ues 391 Used Engine Fluids 0000 391 Door LOCKS si se EE RE eene gates 28 Door Locks Automatic sese 29 Door Opener Garage ceuo mie Ketuai ua cea 159 Drive Belts 22 6 RS GG DS oe eS 392 DEVINE 44 sx ord cte xo eye he ce e a 296 Off Pavement 0 20 00 Se ee eee 296 Off Road RR ac Roe op RR ard 296 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 253 E85 Fuel 22 12 deeem 0 Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 462 INDEX ME Electronic Brake Control System 139 Anti Lock Brake System ss 139 Brake Assist System 000000005 141 Electronic Roll Mitigation
340. s Engine Oil with Filter 3 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 Ots 4 7 Liters 47 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Ots 5 7 Liters 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 7 Qts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 7 Liter Engine Mopar Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 9 Ots 10 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula 4 7 Liter Engine Mopar Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 14 5 Ots 13 7 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula 5 7 Liter Engine Mopar Engine Coolant Antifreeze 5 Year 14 5 Qts 13 7 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology Engine Oil 3 7L 4 7L 5 7L En gines Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Oil Filter All Engines Mopar Oil Filter P N 05281090 Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 Spark Plugs 4 7L Engine Upper Bank FR8TE2 Gap 0 040 Lower Bank FR8T1332 Gap 0 050 Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine REC14MCC4 Gap 0 043 Fuel Selection 3 7L and 4 7L En gines 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engines 87
341. s or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts sc nl Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rear view mirror to provide at least inch 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would e speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking e during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating throu
342. s the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 s
343. s door is open the doors panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors will not lock m The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle until you pull up the lock plungers Automatic Door Locks If this feature is selected your door locks will lock automatically if the vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and all doors are closed It will reset whenever a door is opened This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer Power Door Lock Switch If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Automatic Unlock on Exit Feature Only Available if Auto Lock is Enabled This feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in P Park or N Neutral Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer Child Protection Door Lock The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with child protection locks If you push up on the lever on the open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside of the vehicle Push the lever down to disengage the child protection locks
344. s exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If the seat belt has an automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch pl
345. same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasoline 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your
346. should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn 81c1b7ed low and snug and in the recommended seating 1 Driver Airbag positions Remove and store the extender when not 2 Passenger Airbag needed 3 Knee Bolster en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger side airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow They are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG ut j 813521b6 Window Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open
347. specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off AWD Models Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by depressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for 5 seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is run
348. speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases NOTE The Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper op eration If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON OFF button and re setting the desired vehicle SET speed es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control On Hills The automatic transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS Anti Lock Brake System TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation and ESP Electronic Stability Program All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Also your vehicle is equipped with TSC Trailer Sway
349. ss and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operat
350. ss the the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is switch again to turn the power off producing AC power NOTE Due to built in overload protection the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded EN WARNING To Avoid Serious Injury or Death Do not use a 3 Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use Power Inverter Switch If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric NOTE When the power inverter switch is pressed shock and failure there will be a delay of approximately 1 second before the 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x CUP HOLDERS NOTE The cup holder insert is removable from the console for cleaning It can be reinstalled with the larger cup depression towards the passenger seat but the top surface will not be flush with the console surface Cup Holders Second Row Seat The second row seat has two cup holders in the center armrest Lower the center armrest Refer to Seats in this section Press the front of the cup holder and the cup holder will come out of the armrest Front Cup Holders In the center console there are two cup holders for the front seat passengers Front Cup Holders es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 Cup Holders Third Row Seat The third row seat passengers have cup holders on the left and right rear trim panels Cup Hol
351. st be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or autom
352. stem Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Fuel Saver Mode 5 7L Engine Only Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B Elapsed Time es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 e Service Distance e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL butto
353. stem This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect
354. stem will shut the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid Fob to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Fob to start the engine Either of these condi tions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser viced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speed Pass additional Fobs or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the Fob being used to start the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the Fobs provided with your new vehicle
355. t Rear Right Front Right Rear for 3 seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 330 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR 34 34 8197133c TIRE 35 PSI 24 Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure The system will automatically update the graphic dis play of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Check TPM System Message The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for 3 seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor s is not being received NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BA
356. t Restraint Control Module Airbag Warning Light Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows Side Remote Acceleration Sensors Driver Side Seat Track Position Sensor Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Knee Impact Bolsters Front Acceleration Sensors Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module de termines if a frontal side or rollover collision is severe enough to require the front and or side airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direc tion provided by the ORC The ORC will detect roll overs not rear impacts The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning er Light for 2 5 to 8 seconds for a self check N when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air
357. t add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals Maintenance After Off Road Driving After extended operation in mud sand or water or similar dirty conditions have your brake discs brake linings and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as possible This will prevent any abrasive material from causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action After off road driving completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and suspension Retighten if required to torque values specified in the Service Manual Also check for accumulations of vegeta tion or brush that could become a fire hazard or conceal damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts CAUTION Under frequent heavy duty driving conditions change all lubricants and lubricate body compo nents all driveline joints and steering linkage more often than in normal service to prevent excessive wear ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graph
358. t need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times with 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Seat Belt Extender Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and Restraint Systems SRS when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender
359. t using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle The second row outboard seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attach ments must be installed
360. ted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road STARTING AND OPERATING 329 tires A low spare tire will set the SPARE LOW PRES SURE textual message but it will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings i The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Lef
361. ted with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specification Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 24 22 05 16 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or file
362. the Fan Control to High This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in a compartment behind the third row seat Refer to Cargo Area Features in Section 3 of this manual Jack Storage Location en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369 Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a c
363. the weight referenced on the Tire 352 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents TOW Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on HEIGHT your trailer hitch 81546c40 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the front rear axles of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mende
364. ther interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the gear selection lever Ac cidents can also be caused by pressing the accel erator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheating and ve hicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Normal Starting The gear selector must be in the N Neutral or P Park position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving gear NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extremely Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater availa
365. to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE GASOLINE ENGINES The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation condition the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it h
366. to allow airbag deployment 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during inflation NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the window bags The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to impro
367. transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing NOTE The transfer case must be in the N Neutral position and the transmission must be in the P Park position for recreational towing 360 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Shifting Into Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in N Neutral before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Depress brake pedal 2 Turn the ignition key ON engine off 3 Shift transmission into N Neutral 4 Shift transfer case into N Neutral Hold down N Neutral pin switch with a pen etc for 4 seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress Lamp will stop blinking stay on solid when Neutral shift is complete A 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will display on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual Neutral Switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 5 Start engine 6 Shift transmission into D Drive 7 Release brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 8 Shut the engine off 9 Shift transmission into P Park 10 Place the ignition key in the OFF position and remove key 11 Apply parking brake 12
368. transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 5 for each transmitter 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE x NOTE Once programmed all transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Remote Linked to Memory under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Pro grammable Features in Section 4 for more information Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Exit and Easy Entry adjust ments available e The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 inches 60 mm if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 2 67 inches 68 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 5 inches 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position e The seat shall move to the position located 0 3 inches 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 0 9 inches to 2 67 inches 23 mm to 68 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory driving position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position toward the RUN position The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature will be automatica
369. trol knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the Music Type button to select the following format types Program Type 16 E a No program type or un Penal None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited
370. trol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 program format type to be selected Many radio stations do 16 Digit Character not currently broadcast Music Type information Program Type Display Toggle the Music Type button to select the following Nostalgia Nostalga format types Oldies Oldies 16 Digit Character Personality Persnlty Program Type
371. ts for correct fluid type WARNING Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid as seal damage will result 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Rear Axle Fluid Front Axle Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be to the bottom of the oil fill hole Rear Axle Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be 1 2 1 cm below the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Transfer Case Fluid Level Check Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is found the transfer case fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug located on the back side of the transfer case The fluid level should be at the bottom edge of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a leve
372. u have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns NEE F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 451 WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it m
373. u use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING CAUTION e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Replacing original tires with tires of a different size that specified for your vehicle Some combina tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance charac teristics resulting in changes to steering han dling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and Alignment and Balance suspension components You could lose control Poor suspension alignment may result in and have an accident resulting in serious inju mm or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes wit e Fast tire wear load ratings approved for your vehicle may result in false speedometer and odometer readings e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided wear Never use
374. uages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you con tinue the information will display in the selected lan guage NOTE The EVIC will not change the UConnect language selection Please refer to Language Selection in the HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect section of this manual for details Auto Door Locks When Y YES is selected all of the doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Y YES or N NO appears Auto Unlock On Exit When Y YES is selected all of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park or N Neutral position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Y YES or N NO appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT
375. umulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e After extended operation in mud sand water or PARKING BRAKE similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as possible When the parking brake is applied with the soon as possible ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instru ment cluster will light To release the parking brake pull WARNING up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light indicates only that the parking brake is applied It does not indicate the degree of brake application not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake whe
376. upant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ib 100 Ibs 80 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 865 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs Occupant 1 200 los TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure 1 Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always dr
377. uring the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for a
378. urn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold The EVIC will also display a Spare Low Pressure text message and the graphic display will show a tire pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure value NOTE If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value
379. urself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible 306 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM MDS 5 7L Engine Only This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine s eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required NOTE The MDS system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD g Er SIZE A MAXIMUM DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY gt AND STANDARDS VaN TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 811b44e8 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck
380. use Description Cav Cartridge Min Fuse Description ity Fuse ity Fuse 11 40 Amp HVAC Blower 19 40 Amp JB Power Green Green 12 30 Amp Rear Wiper Ign R O 20 Spare Pink 21 20 Amp Fuel Pump 13 40 Amp Rear Window De Yellow Green froster EBL Heated 22 20 Amp TCM A C Clutch Mirror Yellow 14 30 Amp Rear HVAC If 23 25 Amp Power Inverter Pink Equipped Natural 15 Spare 24 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats 16 50 Amp ASD Yellow Red 25 20 Amp Final Drive Control 17 30 Amp ABS Pump Yellow Module FDCM Pink 26 15 Amp Brake Lamps 18 40 Amp Accessory Delay Seats Blue Green 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Caw Cartridge Min Fuse Description Cav Cartridge Min Fuse Description ity Fuse ity Fuse 27 20 Amp HD Washer If 36 Spare Yellow Equipped 37 20 Amp __ Ignition Switch 28 30 Amp ABS Valves Yellow Green 38 20 Amp HID Left 29 20 Amp PCM Batt Gasoline Yellow Yellow Only 39 20Amp HID Right 30 Spare Yellow 31 Spare 40 25 Amp Next Generation Con 32 15 Amp Powertrain Control Natural troller NGC Injec Blue Module Diesel Only tors 33 20 Amp Final Drive Control 41 ES Spare Yellow Module FDCM 42 Spare E Diff 43 25 Amp Coils Actuators 34 Spare Natural 35 20 Amp Trail Tow Mod BUX 44 Spare Yellow Only ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 Underhood Fus
381. uts to the following lists on the iPod e 1 Playlists e 2 Artists e 3 Albums e 4 Genres e 5 Audiobooks e 6 Podcasts After pressing a preset button you will see the list you are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit the List mode without selecting a track press the same preset button again to go back to Play mode LIST Button Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu of the iPod This takes you to the same top level menu as on your iPod Turn the TUNE SCROLL knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and then press the TUNE SCROLL knob This will take you to the next sub menu list item of the iPod and you can follow the same the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE Button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 SATELLITE RADIO RSC IF EQUIPPED REQ AND RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation Sir
382. valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking To remove the valet key from the Fob slide the mechani cal latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other hand 81bb182d 3 Button FOBIK NOTE You can insert the double sided valet key into the lock cylinders with either side up 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Ignition Key Removal Place the selector lever in P Park Turn the key to the LOCK position and remove the key NOTE e If you try to remove the key before you place the selector lever in P Park it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi tion Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual WARNING the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you o
383. ve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be triggered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
384. ver and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever towards you CANCEL or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 30 mph 48 km h for 3 7L 4 7L engines and 25 mph 40 km h for 5 7L engines To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 2 mph 3 km h 3 7L 4 7L models or a 1 mph 2 km h 5 7L models speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 6 mph 10 km h 3 7L 4 7L models or 3 mph 5 km h 5 7L models To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new
385. when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Shift into P Park only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of R Reverse only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from R Reverse P Park or N Shift Lock Manual Override If Equipped Neutral into any forward gear when the engine is Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual above idle speed override The manual override may be used in the event Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot that the shift lever should fail to move from Park with the is firmly on the brake pedal key in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed To operate the shift lock manual override perform the following steps 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel 3 Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 4 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down 5 Move the shift lever into the N Neutral position 6 The vehicle may then be started in N Neutral Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Brake Transmission Interl
386. window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD lab
387. xles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded en STARTING AND OPERATING 345 Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and
388. xtra Heavy Duty 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain en STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Engine Model GCWR Gross Com Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Tongue Wt Transmission bined Wt Rating Trailer Wt See Note 1 3 7L 4x2 8 670 Ibs 3 933 kg 40 Sq Ft 3 72 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg Automatic square meters 3 7L 4x4 8 755 Ibs 3 971 kg 40 Sq Ft 3 72 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg Automatic square meters 4 7L 4x2 11 665 Ibs 5 291 kg 60 Sq Ft 5 57 6 500 Ibs 2 948 kg 650 Ibs 295 kg Automatic square meters 4 7L 4x4 11 800 Ibs 5 352 kg 60 Sq Ft 5 57 6 500 Ibs 2 948 kg 650 Ibs 295 kg Automatic square meters 5 7L 4x2 12 470 Ibs 5 656 kg 60 Sq Ft 5 57 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg 720 lbs 327 kg Automatic square meters 5 7L 4x4 12 620 Ibs 5 724 kg 60 Sq Ft 5 57 7 200 Ibs 3 266 kg 720 lbs 327 kg Automatic square meters Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information section in this manual NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed
389. y prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone mu
390. y Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy man agement feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly automatic locking retrac tor feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Seat Belt Pretensioners The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision This device improves the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Control ORC Module Like
391. y device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone UConnect If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Communication UConnect in Section 3 of this manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is int
392. y supplemental addi tives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of the used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your local authorized dealer ser vice station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every oil change 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner No belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re quired See your authorized dealer for service At the mileage indicated in the Maintenance Schedule all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts
393. ystem or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt a

2008 Jeep Commander Owners Manual - Dealer e

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents